mentioned, registered or not, are the property of their respective companies. The technical and other data contained in this document is provided for information only.

Neither ALSTOM, its officers or employees accept responsibility for, or should be taken as making any representation or warranty (whether express or implied), as to

the accuracy or completeness of such data or the achievement of any projected performance criteria where these are indicated. ALSTOM reserves the right to revise or

change this data at any time without further notice.

MiCOM P543, P544, P545,

P546

Technical Manual

Current Differential Protection Relays

Platform Hardware Version: K

Platform Software Version: 45 & 55

Publication Reference:

P54x/EN M/La4

GRID

Table of Contents

Chapters

Table of Contents

Need help?

Do you have a question about the MiCOM P54 Series and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Summary of Contents for Alstom MiCOM P54 Series

Page 1 Neither ALSTOM, its officers or employees accept responsibility for, or should be taken as making any representation or warranty (whether express or implied), as to the accuracy or completeness of such data or the achievement of any projected performance criteria where these are indicated. ALSTOM reserves the right to revise or...
Page 3: Table Of Contents
CONTENTS Safety Section P54x/EN SS/H11 Update Documentation P54x/EN AD/xxx Section 1 Introduction P54x/EN IT/La4 Section 2 Technical Data P54x/EN TD/La4 Section 3 Getting Started P54x/EN GS/La4 Section 4 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 Section 5 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 Section 6 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 Section 7 Programmable Logic...
Page 5: P54X/En Ss/H11
Safety Section P54x/EN SS/H11 SAFETY SECTION...
Page 6 P54x/EN SS/H11 Safety Section...
Page 7 Safety Section P54x/EN SS/H11 (SS) - 1 CONTENTS INTRODUCTION HEALTH AND SAFETY SYMBOLS AND LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT Symbols Labels INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING DE-COMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY Protective fuse rating Protective class Installation category Environment...
Page 8 P54x/EN SS/H11 Safety Section (SS) - 2...
Page 9 However, the manuals cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate Alstom Grid technical sales office and request the necessary information.
Page 10 P54x/EN SS/H11 Safety Section (SS) - 4 SYMBOLS AND LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT For safety reasons the following symbols which may be used on the equipment or referred to in the equipment documentation, should be understood before it is installed or commissioned.
Page 11 (SS) - 5 Watchdog (self-monitoring) contacts are provided in numerical relays to indicate the health of the device. Alstom Grid strongly recommends that these contacts are hardwired into the substation's automation system, for alarm purposes. To ensure that wires are correctly terminated the correct crimp terminal and tool for the wire size should be used.
Page 12 P54x/EN SS/H11 Safety Section (SS) - 6 UL and CSA/CUL listed or recognized equipment To maintain UL and CSA/CUL Listing/Recognized status for North America the equipment should be installed using UL or CSA Listed or Recognized parts for the following items: connection cables, protective fuses/fuseholders or circuit breakers, insulation crimp terminals and replacement internal battery, as specified in the equipment documentation.
Page 13 Safety Section P54x/EN SS/H11 (SS) - 7 External test blocks and test plugs Great care should be taken when using external test blocks and test plugs such as the MMLG, MMLB and MiCOM P990 types, hazardous voltages may be accessible when using these. *CT shorting links must be in place before the insertion or removal of MMLB test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages.
Page 14 P54x/EN SS/H11 Safety Section (SS) - 8 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY Unless otherwise stated in the equipment technical manual, the following data is applicable. Protective fuse rating The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for equipments is 16A, high rupture capacity (HRC) Red Spot type NIT, or TIA, or equivalent.
Page 15: P54X/En It/La4
Introduction P54x/EN IT/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 INTRODUCTION Date: March 2009 Hardware Suffix: Software Version: 45 (P543/4/5/6 without Distance) 55 (P543/4/5/6 with Distance) Connection Diagrams: 10P54302 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54303 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54400 10P54404 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54405 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54502 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54503 (SH 1 to 2)
Page 16 P54x/EN IT/La4 Introduction MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 17 Introduction P54x/EN IT/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (IT) 1-1 CONTENTS (IT) 1- MICOM DOCUMENTATION STRUCTURE INTRODUCTION TO MICOM PRODUCT SCOPE Functional overview Ordering options FIGURES Figure 1: Functional diagram...
Page 18 P54x/EN IT/La4 Introduction (IT) 1-2 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 19: Micom Documentation Structure
Introduction P54x/EN IT/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (IT) 1-3 MICOM DOCUMENTATION STRUCTURE The manual provides a functional and technical description of the P54x differential and distance protection relay and a comprehensive set of instructions for the relay’s use and application.
Page 20 P54x/EN TS Troubleshooting Advice on how to recognize failure modes and the recommended course of action. Includes guidance on whom within ALSTOM Grid to contact for advice. P54x/EN SC SCADA Communications This chapter provides an overview regarding the SCADA communication interfaces of the relay.
Page 21: Introduction To Micom
INTRODUCTION TO MICOM MiCOM is a comprehensive solution capable of meeting all electricity supply requirements. It comprises a range of components, systems and services from ALSTOM Grid. Central to the MiCOM concept is flexibility. MiCOM provides the ability to define an application solution and, through extensive communication capabilities, integrate it with your power supply control system.
Page 22: Product Scope
P54x/EN IT/La4 Introduction (IT) 1-6 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 PRODUCT SCOPE The P54x is designed for all overhead line and cable applications, as it interfaces readily with the longitudinal (end-end) communications channel between line terminals. P54x includes a high-speed current differential unit protection with optional high performance sub cycle distance protection including phase segregated aided directional earth fault DEF.
Page 23 Introduction P54x/EN IT/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (IT) 1-7 Models ANSI FEATURE P543 P544 P545 P546 Phase elements Characteristic Mho and quadrilateral Ground elements     CVT transient overreach elimination     Load blinder ...
Page 24 P54x/EN IT/La4 Introduction (IT) 1-8 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Models ANSI FEATURE P543 P544 P545 P546     Check synchronism, 2 stages Alternative setting groups     Fault locator SOE event records Disturbance recorder, samples per cycle. For waveform capture ...
Page 25 Introduction P54x/EN IT/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (IT) 1-9 Application overview Figure 1 Functional diagram...
Page 26: Ordering Options
P54x/EN IT/La4 Introduction (IT) 1-10 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Ordering options Information Required with Order P54x Current differential protection Current Differential for single breaker (60TE/12”) Current Differential for dual breaker (60TE/12”) Current Differential for single breaker (80TE/12”) Current Differential for dual breaker (80TE/12”) Auxiliary voltage rating 24 - 48 Vdc 48 - 125 Vdc (40 -100Vac)
Page 27 Introduction P54x/EN IT/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (IT) 1-11 Protocol options K-Bus IEC60870-5-103 (VDEW) DNP3.0 IEC 61850 + Courier via rear EIA(RS)485 port IEC 61850 + IEC 60870-5-103 via rear EIA(RS)485 port DNP3.0 over ethernet Mounting Flush Panel Rack (P545, P546 only) Language options Multilingual - English, French, German, Spanish...
Page 28 P54x/EN IT/La4 Introduction (IT) 1-12 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 29: P54X/En Td/La4
Technical Data P54x/EN TD/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 TECHNICAL DATA Date: March 2009 Hardware Suffix: Software Version: 45 (P543/4/5/6 without Distance) 55 (P543/4/5/6 with Distance) Connection Diagrams: 10P54302 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54303 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54400 10P54404 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54405 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54502 (SH 1 to 2)
Page 30 P54x/EN TD/La4 Technical Data MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 31 Technical Data P54x/EN TD/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (TD) 2-1 Front download/monitor port Technical data EIA(RS)232, 25 pin D-type female connector. For firmware downloads. Mechanical specifications Isolation to ELV level. Design Rear communications port Modular MiCOM Px40 platform relay, available EIA(RS)485 signal levels, two wire in 2 different case sizes: Connections located on general purpose block,...
Page 32 P54x/EN TD/La4 Technical Data (TD) 2-2 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Ratings Power supply interruption Per IEC 60255-11: 1979 The relay will withstand a 20 ms interruption AC measuring inputs in the DC auxiliary supply, without Nominal frequency: 50 and 60 Hz (settable) de-energizing.
Page 33 Technical Data P54x/EN TD/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (TD) 2-3 Make, Carry: Output contacts 30 A for 3 secs, dc resistive, 10,000 operations (subject to the above limits of Standard contacts make / break capacity & rated voltage) General purpose relay outputs for signaling, tripping and alarming: Continuous Carry Ratings (Not Switched):...
Page 34 P54x/EN TD/La4 Technical Data (TD) 2-4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Environmental conditions Impulse voltage withstand test Per IEC 60255-27: 2005 Front time: 1.2 µs, Time to half-value: 50 µs, Ambient temperature range Peak value: 5 kV, 0.5J Per IEC 60255-6: 1988 Between all terminals, and all terminals and Operating temperature range: case earth.
Page 35 Technical Data P54x/EN TD/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (TD) 2-5 Surge immunity test Radiated emissions EIA(RS)232 ports excepted. Per EN 55022: 1998: Per IEC 61000-4-5: 2002 Level 4, 30 - 230 MHz, 40 dBV/m at 10 m Time to half-value: 1.2/50 µs, measurement distance Amplitude: 4 kV between all groups and 230 - 1 GHz, 47 dBV/m at 10 m...
Page 36 P54x/EN TD/La4 Technical Data (TD) 2-6 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Mechanical robustness Vibration test Per IEC 60255-21-1: 1996 Response Class 2 Endurance Class 2 Shock and Bump Per IEC 60255-21-2: 1995 Shock response Class 2 Shock withstand Class 1 Bump Class 1 Seismic test Per IEC 60255-21-3: 1995...
Page 37 Technical Data P54x/EN TD/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (TD) 2-7 60 Hz operation Protection functions Phase current differential protection Accuracy Pick-up: Formula 10% Drop-off: 0.75 x Formula 10% IDMT characteristic shape: 5% or 40 ms whichever is greater DT operation: 2% or 20 ms whichever is greater Instantaneous Operation: <30 ms...
Page 38 P54x/EN TD/La4 Technical Data (TD) 2-8 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 IEEE reset: 17.5% or 60 ms Overvoltage whichever is greater DT operation: 2% or 50 ms Accuracy whichever is greater DT Pick-up: Setting 1% DT reset: 5% or 50 ms whichever is IDMT Pick-up: 1.02 x setting 2% greater Drop-off: 0.98 x setting 2%...
Page 39 Technical Data P54x/EN TD/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (TD) 2-9 Voltage transformer supervision Auto-reclose and check synchronism Accuracy Fast block operation: <1 cycle Fast block reset: <1.5 cycles Accuracy Timers: Time delay: Setting 20 ms or 2%, whichever is greater 20 ms or 2%, whichever is greater Measurements and recording Current transformer supervision...
Page 40 P54x/EN TD/La4 Technical Data (TD) 2-10 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Fault locator Permissive op Direct op Configuration times (ms) times (ms) IM64 at 64 k 13 - 18 17 - 20 Accuracy Fault location: 2% of line length (under IM64 at 56 k 15 - 20 19 - 22...
Page 41 Technical Data P54x/EN TD/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (TD) 2-11 CB Status Time 0.1 ... 5 s Settings, measurements and CB2 Status Input: None, 52A 3 pole, records list 52B 3 pole, 52A & 52B 3 pole, 52A 1 pole, Settings list 52B 1 pole, 52A &...
Page 42 P54x/EN TD/La4 Technical Data (TD) 2-12 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Phase Diff: Disabled/Enabled P544 and P546 CT and VT ratio settings : Overcurrent: Disabled/Enabled Main VT Primary: 100 V…1000 kV Neg Sequence O/C: Disabled/Enabled Main VT Sec’y: 80…140 V Broken Conductor: Disabled/Enabled CB1 CS VT Prim’y:...
Page 43 Technical Data P54x/EN TD/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (TD) 2-13 Input 1 Trigger: No Trigger/Trigger Fiber Optic RP1 CS103 Blocking: (up to): Input 32 Trigger: No Trigger/Trigger Disabled Monitor Blocking Command Blocking Measured operating data (measure't setup) Default Display: DNP3.0 protocol : (EIA485) RP1 Address: 0…65519...
Page 44 P54x/EN TD/La4 Technical Data (TD) 2-14 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Commission tests P544 and P546 CB monitor setup : CB1 Broken ^: 1…2 Monitor Bit 1: CB1 ^ Maintenance: Alarm Disabled/ (up to): Alarm Enabled Monitor Bit 8: CB1 ^ Maintenance: 1…25000 n^ Binary function link strings, selecting which CB1 ^ Lockout:...
Page 45 Technical Data P54x/EN TD/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (TD) 2-15 Control Input 32: Latched/Pulsed MaxCh 1 PropDelay: 1 m...50 ms Ctrl Command 1: MaxCh 2 PropDelay: 1 m...50 ms TxRx Delay Stats: Disabled/Enabled (up to): Ctrl Command 32: MaxCh1 Tx-RxTime: 1 m...50 ms ON/OFF MaxCh2 Tx-RxTime: 1 m...50 ms...
Page 46 P54x/EN TD/La4 Technical Data (TD) 2-16 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Z1 Ph. Sensit. Iph>1: 0.050…2.000 In Phase distance Z2 Ph. Reach: 0.05…500.00/In  Phase Chars.: Mho/Quadrilateral Quad Z2 Ph. Angle: 20…90° Resistance: Common/Proportional Z2 Ph Resistive: 0.05…500.00/In  Fault Resistance: 0.05…500.00/In ...
Page 47 Technical Data P54x/EN TD/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (TD) 2-17 kZNP Res. Angle: -180…90° tZP Ph. Delay: 0 s...10 s kZmP Mut. Comp.: 0.00…10.00 tZP Gnd. Delay: 0 s...10 s kZmP Mut. Angle: -180…90° Zone 4 Tripping: Disabled/Phase only/ RP Gnd Resistive: 0.05…500.00/In ...
Page 48 P54x/EN TD/La4 Technical Data (TD) 2-18 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Z1 extension (up to): Z1 Ext Scheme: Disabled/Enabled/En. I>4 Time Delay on Ch1 Fail/En. On Ch2 Fail/En All Ch All settings and options chosen from the Fail/En. anyCh Fail same ranges as per the third stage Z1 Ext Ph: 100%...200%...
Page 49 Technical Data P54x/EN TD/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (TD) 2-19 I2> Char Angle: -95…95 o IN>4 Time Delay I2> V2pol Set: All settings and options chosen from the 0.5…25.0 (100 – 110 V) same ranges as per the third stage ground overcurrent, IN>3.
Page 50 P54x/EN TD/La4 Technical Data (TD) 2-20 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 ISEF>3 Directional: Out of step Non-Directional OST (Out of Step Tripping) mode: Directional Fwd Disabled Directional Rev Predictive and OST Trip ISEF>3 Current Set: 0.005…0.8 In OST Trip ISEF>3 Time Delay: 0 s…200 s Predictive OST ISEF>3 Intertrip: Enabled/Disabled...
Page 51 Technical Data P54x/EN TD/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (TD) 2-21 V>2 Time Delay: 0.00…100.00 s I< Only V1>1 Cmp Funct: CB Open & I< Disabled Prot Reset & I< WI Prot Reset: Disabled/Enabled IDMT Undercurrent I< Current Set: 0.02…3.20 In V1>1 Cmp Vlt Set: 60…110 V ISEF<...
Page 52 P54x/EN TD/La4 Technical Data (TD) 2-22 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Overvoltage Auto-reclose Differential UV & OV P543 and P545 auto-reclose: UV & DiffV Single Pole Shot: 1/2/3/4 OV & DiffV Three Pole Shot: 1/2/3/4 UV, OV & DiffV 1 Pole Dead Time: 0.05…5.00 s System Split Dead Time 1: 0.05…100.00 s...
Page 53 Technical Data P54x/EN TD/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (TD) 2-23 System Checks All time-delayed distance zones can be CheckSync1 Close: Disabled/Enabled independently set not to act upon AR logic, CheckSync2 Close: Disabled/Enabled to initiate a cycle, or to block. LiveLine/DeadBus: Disabled/Enabled DEF Aided AR: DeadLine/LiveBus: Disabled/Enabled...
Page 54 P54x/EN TD/La4 Technical Data (TD) 2-24 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 CB2F SC all: Enabled/Disabled I1 Phase Angle CB2F SC Shot 1: Enabled/Disabled I2 Magnitude CB2F SC CS1: Enabled/Disabled I2 Phase Angle CB2F SC CS2: Enabled/Disabled I0 Magnitude CB2F SC DLLB: Enabled/Disabled I0 Phase Angle CB2F SC LLDB:...
Page 55 Technical Data P54x/EN TD/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (TD) 2-25 IA Ang remote 1 Max Ch2 TxRx Time IB remote 1 Clear Statistics IB Ang remote 1 IC remote 1 Circuit breaker monitoring statistics IC Ang remote 1 CB Operations IA remote 2 CB ...
Page 56 P54x/EN TD/La4 Technical Data (TD) 2-26 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 V Prefault Mag V Prefault Ang Per phase record of the voltage magnitudes and phase angles stored before the fault inception. VN Prefault Mag VN Prefault Ang I Fault Mag I...
Page 57: P54X/En Gs/La4
Getting Started P54x/EN GS/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 GETTING STARTED Date: March 2009 Hardware Suffix: Software Version: 45 (P543/4/5/6 without Distance) 55 (P543/4/5/6 with Distance) Connection Diagrams: 10P54302 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54303 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54400 10P54404 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54405 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54502 (SH 1 to 2)
Page 58 P54x/EN GS/La4 Getting Started MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 59 Getting Started P54x/EN GS/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (GS) 3-1 CONTENTS (GS) 3- GETTING STARTED User interfaces and menu structure Introduction to the relay 1.2.1 Front panel 1.2.2 LED indications 1.2.3 Relay rear panel Relay connection and power-up Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options Menu structure 1.5.1...
Page 60 P54x/EN GS/La4 Getting Started (GS) 3-2 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 FIGURES Figure 1 Relay front view Figure 2 P543 relay rear view (60TE) Figure 3 Menu structure Figure 4 Front panel user interface Figure 5 Hotkey menu navigation Figure 6 Front port connection Figure 7...
Page 61 Getting Started P54x/EN GS/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (GS) 3-3 GETTING STARTED User interfaces and menu structure The settings and functions of the MiCOM protection and control relays are available from the front panel keypad and LCD, and through the front and rear communication ports. Introduction to the relay 1.2.1 Front panel...
Page 62 P54x/EN GS/La4 Getting Started (GS) 3-4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546  Hotkey functionality: SCROLL Starts scrolling through the various default displays.   STOP Stops scrolling the default display.  For control of setting groups, control inputs and circuit breaker operation ...
Page 63 Getting Started P54x/EN GS/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (GS) 3-5 The default mappings for each of the programmable LEDs are as shown in the following table: Default P543 P544 P545 P546 number indication Diff Trip Diff Trip Diff Trip Diff Trip Dist Inst Dist Inst Trip...
Page 64 P54x/EN GS/La4 Getting Started (GS) 3-6 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Figure 2 P543 relay rear view (60TE) Above diagram indicates example P543 60TE case layout for Note: information purposes, exact layout will vary depending on model configuration and case size. Refer to the wiring diagram in chapter P54x/EN IN for complete connection details.
Page 65 Getting Started P54x/EN GS/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (GS) 3-7 Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options The relay has three user interfaces:  The front panel user interface via the LCD and keypad  The front port which supports Courier communication ...
Page 66 P54x/EN GS/La4 Getting Started (GS) 3-8 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Column header Up to 4 protection setting groups System data Overcurrent Overcurrent View records Ground fault Ground fault Column data settings Control & support Group 1 Group 2 Repeated for groups 2, 3 and 4 P0106ENa Figure 3...
Page 67 If the passwords are lost, contact ALSTOM Grid with the relay’s serial number and an emergency password can be supplied. To find the current level of access enabled for an interface, select System data > Access level.
Page 68 P54x/EN GS/La4 Getting Started (GS) 3-10 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Front panel user interface (keypad and LCD) When the keypad is exposed it provides full access to the menu options of the relay, with the information displayed on the LCD. , ...
Page 69 Getting Started P54x/EN GS/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (GS) 3-11 Whenever there is an uncleared alarm present in the relay (e.g. fault record, protection alarm, control alarm etc.) the default display will be replaced by: Alarms/Faults Present Entry to the menu structure of the relay is made from the default display and is not affected if the display is showing the Alarms/Faults present message.
Page 70 P54x/EN GS/La4 Getting Started (GS) 3-12 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 1.8.3.2 Control inputs - user assignable functions Use the CTRL I/P CONFIG column to configure the number of USR ASS shown in the hotkey menu. To SET/RESET the chosen inputs, use the HOTKEY menu. For more information refer to the “Control Inputs”...
Page 71 Getting Started P54x/EN GS/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (GS) 3-13 1.8.4 Password entry 1. When a password is required to edit a setting, an Enter password prompt appears. Enter password **** Level 2 The password required to edit the setting is the prompt as shown Note: above.
Page 72 Courier communication protocol only. Courier is the communication language developed by ALSTOM Grid to allow communication with its range of protection relays. The front port is particularly designed for use with the relay settings program MiCOM S1 Studio which runs on Windows 2000 or XP.
Page 73 Getting Started P54x/EN GS/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (GS) 3-15 MiCOM relay Laptop SK 2 SK 1 25 pin download/monitor port 9 pin Battery front comms port Serial communication port (COM 1 or COM 2) Serial data connector (up to 15m) P0107ENb Figure 6...
Page 74 P54x/EN GS/La4 Getting Started (GS) 3-16 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Figure 7 PC - relay signal connection Having made the physical connection from the relay to the PC, the PC’s communication settings must be configured to match those of the relay. The relay’s communication settings for the front port are fixed as shown in the table below: Courier Protocol...
Page 75 Getting Started P54x/EN GS/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (GS) 3-17 1.10 MiCOM S1 Studio relay communications basics The EIA(RS)232 front communication port is intended for use with the relay settings program MiCOM S1 Studio. This program runs on Windows 2000, XP or Vista, and is the universal MiCOM relay Support Software used for direct access to all stored data in any MiCOM relay.
Page 76 P54x/EN GS/La4 Getting Started (GS) 3-18 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 6. Select the device type. 7. Select the communications port. 8. Once connected, select the language for the settings file, the device name, then click Finish. The configuration is updated. 9.
Page 77: P54X/En St/La4
Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 SETTINGS Date: March 2009 Hardware Suffix: Software Version: 45 (P543/4/5/6 without Distance) 55 (P543/4/5/6 with Distance) Connection Diagrams: 10P54302 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54303 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54400 10P54404 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54405 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54502 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54503 (SH 1 to 2)
Page 78 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546...
Page 79 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-1 CONTENTS (ST) 4- SETTINGS Relay settings configuration 1.1.1 Default settings restore Protection communication configuration Protection GROUP settings 1.3.1 Line parameters 1.3.2 Distance setup (only for models with distance option) 1.3.3 Distance elements (only for models with distance option) 1.3.4 Phase differential...
Page 80 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-2 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 1.4.4 CT/VT ratios 1.4.4.1 CT/VT ratios ( P543/P545) 1.4.4.2 CT/VT ratios (P544/P546) 1.4.5 Record control 1.4.6 Measurements 1.4.7 Communications settings 1.4.7.1 Communications settings f or courier protocol 1.4.7.2 Communications settings for IEC 60870-5-103 protocol 1.4.7.3 Communications settings for DNP3.0 protocol...
Page 81 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-3 SETTINGS The MiCOM P54x must be configured to the system and application by means of appropriate settings. The sequence in which the settings are listed and described in this chapter will be the protection setting, control and configuration settings and the disturbance recorder settings.
Page 82 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Menu text Default setting Available settings No Operation Copy to No Operation Group 1, 2, 3 or 4 Allows displayed settings to be copied to a se lected setting gr oup (ready to paste Setting Group 1 Enabled...
Page 83 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-5 Menu text Default setting Available settings PowerSwing Block Enabled Enabled or Disabled Only in models with Distance option. To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the power swing blocking/out of step: ANSI 68/78. Volt Protection Disabled Enabled or Disabled...
Page 84 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-6 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Menu text Default setting Available settings Commission Tests Visible Invisible or Visible Sets the Commissioning Tests menu visible further on in the relay settings menu. Setting Values Primary Primary or Secondary This affects all protection settings that are dependent upon CT and VT ratios.
Page 85 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-7 Each setting below that refers to Channel 2 is associated with the communications setting of the second communications channel (where fitted) and is visible only when 3 Terminal or ual redundant telep rotection c onfigura tion is set.
Page 86 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-8 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. Baud Rate Ch 2 64kbits/s 56kbits/s or 64kbits/s As ‘Baud Rate Ch1’ cell. Clock Source Ch1 Internal Internal or External Setting that defines which clock source is used to synchronize data transmissions over channel 1.
Page 87 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-9 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. Three Ended, Two Ended (R1&R2) , Two Re-Configuration Three Ended Ended (L&R2) or Two Ended (L&R1) This setting is to ch ange the sch eme from thre...
Page 88 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-10 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. GPS Fail Timer 9999 s Time delay setting after which the ‘GPS Alarm ’ – DDB 310 is asserted following a lo ss of GPS signal or initiation by the GPS transient fail alarm function when active(see below).
Page 89 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-11 1.3.1 Line parameters The column GROUP x LINE PARAMETERS is used to enter the characteristics of the prote cted line or cable. These settings are used by the fault locator as the base data for nput to the distance to fault algorithm, and also as the reference for all distance zones when he Distance set up is preferred in the ‘Simple’...
Page 90 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-12 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. kZm Mutual Set Setting of the mutual compensation factor kZm magnitude is calculated as a ratio: kZm = ZM where, = zero sequ ence mutual impedance for the protected line or cable.
Page 91 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-13 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. Setting Setting Mode Simple Simple or Advanced Mode Setting to select setting mode for Distance protection, depending on type of application and user preferences.
Page 92 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-14 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. Enabled or Disabled or Enable n CH Z3 Ph Status Enabled Fail As per Z1, but applicable to Zone 3. Z3 Phase Reach 250% 1000%...
Page 93 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-15 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. Enabled or Disabl ed or En able d on CH Z1 Gnd Status Enabled Fail To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) or enable (only in the case tha...
Page 94 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-16 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. Digital Filter Standard Standard or Special Application Setting to enab le (activa te) ‘Stand ard’ or ‘Spec ial Application’ filters. ‘Standard’ filters a the default sett ing and s hould be a...
Page 95 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-17 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. DELTA DIRECTION Delta Status Enabled Disabled or Enabled Setting used to activate (enable) or turn off (disable) Delta Direction. To enable (activate) or disable (turn off) delta d irection decision used by distance elements.
Page 96 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-18 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. R2 Ph. Resistive 15/In Ω 0.05/In Ω 500/In Ω 0.01/In Ω Setting for Z2 resistive reach. Z2 Tilt Top Line -3°...
Page 97 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-19 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. Z4 Tilt Top Line -3° -30° 30° 1° Setting of Z4 top reacta nce line gr adient. Z4 Sensit. Iph>4 0.05 x In 0.05 x In 2 x In...
Page 98 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-20 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. kZN2 Res. Comp. 0.001 Setting of Z2 residual compensation magnitude. kZN2 Res. Angle -180° 90° 1° Setting of Z2 residual compensation angle. R2 Gnd.
Page 99 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-21 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. ZP Gnd. Angle 70° 20° 90° 1° Setting of line angle (pos itive sequence) for zon e P. ZP Dynamic Tilt Enabled Disabled or Enabled Setting that enables or di...
Page 100 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-22 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. Z4 Sensit. Ignd>4 0.05 x In 0.05 x In 2 x In 0.01 x In Zone 4 current sensitivity. 1.3.4 Phase diffe rential he column “GROU...
Page 101 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-23 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. Phase TMS 0.025 0.005 Setting for the time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEC IDMT characteristic. Phase Time Dial 0.01 0.01...
Page 102 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-24 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. Phase Is1 CTS 1.2*In 0.2*In 4*In 0.05*In Setting that defines the minimum pick-up level of the relay when a current transformer supervision CTS is dec lared...
Page 103 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-25 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. tZP Gnd. Delay 0.4 s 10 s 0.01 s Time delay for ZP ground element. Disabled, Phase only, Ground only, or Zone 4 Tripping Phase and Ground Phase and Ground...
Page 104 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-26 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. Aid. 1 DeltaTrip 3 Pole 1 or 3 Pole Setting that defines tripping mode for Aided 1 Delta. This setting is visible only if tripping mode under GROUP x LINE PARAMETERS/ Trip Mode is set to 1 an d 3 p ole.
Page 105 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-27 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. AIDED SCHEME 2 All the settings are similar to AIDED SCHEME 1 above. Elements are mapped to the second scheme when they are wished to run independent of Aided Scheme 1. Trip On Close SOTF Status Enabled Pole Dead...
Page 106 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-28 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. TOC Delay 0.2 s 0.05 s 0.2 s 0.01 s The TOC Delay is a user settab le time delay foll owin g the CB o pening...
Page 107 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-29 1.3.6 Power swing blocking (only in models with distance option) The column GROUP x POWER SWING Blk. is used to set either blocking or indication for ut of step conditions. If blocking mode is selected, a user can individually select for each one to be either blocked or allow tripping.
Page 108 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-30 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. PSB Reset Delay 0.2 s 0.05 s 0.05 s Setting to maintain the power swing detection for a period after the delta current detection has reset.
Page 109 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-31 1.3.7 Phase overcurrren t protecti The overcurrent protection included in the MiCOM P54x provides four stage non-directional/ irectional phase segregated overcurrent protection with independent time d elay haracteristics. All overcurrent and directional settings apply to each phase bu t are indep endent for each of the four stages.
Page 110 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-32 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. Disabled, Enabled, Enabled VTS, Enabled >3 Status Disabled Ch Fail, En VTSorCh Fail, En VTSandCh Fail Setting that defines third stage overcurrent operating status. Depending of this setting, I> will be enabled permanently or in case of Vo ltage Transformer Supervision (fuse fail) operation, or i...
Page 111 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-33 1.3.8 Negative sequence overcurrent The negative sequence overcurrent protection included in the MiCOM P54x provides four stage non-directional/ directional phase segregated negative sequence overcurrent protection with independent time delay c haracteristics.
Page 112 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-34 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. 2>3 Current Set 0.2 x n 0.08n 32n 0.01n Pick-up setting for the third stage negative sequence overcurrent element. 2>3 Time Delay 10 s 100 s 0.01 s...
Page 113 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-35 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E inverse, UK LT Inverse IEEE M Inverse, N>1 Function IEC S Inverse IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse, IDG Setting for the tripping characteristic for the first stage earth fault overcurrent element.
Page 114 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-36 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. Non-directional N>3 Directional Non-directional Directional Fwd Directional Rev This setting determines the direction of measurement for the earth fault overcurrent element.
Page 115 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-37 1.3.11 Aided DEF (only in models with d istance option) The column GROUP x AIDED DEF is used to set all parameters for operation of DEF (Directional Earth Fault aided scheme thresholds). As this configuration merely assigns pick up at the local end only, they need to be further configured to a selected Aided channel scheme under GROUP x SCHEME LOGIC to provide unit protection.
Page 116 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-38 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 1.3.12 Sensitive earth fault If a system is earthed through a high impedan ce, or is subj ect to high ground fault resistance, the earth fa t level wil l be severely l imited.
Page 117 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-39 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. Non-directional SEF>3 Direction Non-directional Directional Fwd Directional Rev This setting determines the direction of measurement for the third stage element. 0.005 x SEF>3 Current 0.4 x n...
Page 118 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-40 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 1.3.13 Residual overvoltage (neutral voltage displacement) The NVD element within the MiCOM P54x is of two-stage design, each stage having eparate voltage and time delay settings. Stage 1 may be set to operate on either an ID r DT characteristic, whilst stage 2 may be set to DT only.
Page 119 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-41 1.3.14 Thermal overload The thermal overload function within the MiCOM P54x is capable of being selected as a single time constant or dual time constant char acteristic, dependent on the type of plant to e protected.
Page 120 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-42 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. Disabled V<1 Function IDMT Tripping characteristic for the first stage undervoltage function. The I DMT charac teristic a vailable on the firs t stage is defined by the following f ormula: / (1 - M)
Page 121 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-43 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. V<1 & V<2 Any Ph V<1 & V<2 3Phase V> Operate Mode V<1 & V<2 Any Ph V<1AnyPh V<2 3Ph V<1 3Ph V<2AnyPh Setting that determines whether any phase or all three phases has to satisfy the...
Page 122 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-44 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. V1>1 Cmp Tim Dly 10 s 100 s 0.01 s Setting for the operating time-delay for th e first stage definite time compensated overvoltage element.
Page 123 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-45 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. Bit 0 F<1 U/V Block Bit 1 F<2 U/V Block F< Function Link 0000 Bit 2 F<3 U/V Block Bit 3 F<4 U/V Block Settings that...
Page 124 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-46 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. df/dt>2 Status Enabled Enabled or Disabled (same as stage1) df/dt>3 Status Enabled Enabled or Disabled (sam e as stage 1) df/dt>...
Page 125 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-47 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. Prot. Reset & < < Only, CB Open & <, Prot. Reset & < Ext. Prot. Reset Setting which determines the elements that will reset the circuit breaker fail time for external protection function initiated circuit breaker fail conditions.
Page 126 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-48 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. VTS Time Delay 10 s 0.1 s Setting that determines the operating time-d y of the element upon detectio n of a voltage supervision condition.
Page 127 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-49 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. CTS Time Delay 10 s Setting that determines the operating time-delay of the element upon detection of a current transformer supervisio n condition.
Page 128 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-50 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. CS1 Slip Control Frequency Frequency/Both/Timer/None Setting that determines whether slip control is by slip frequency only, frequen cy + timer o timer only criteria to satisfy the first stage check sync.
Page 129 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-51 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. CS Overvoltage 130 V 60 V 185 V 0.5 V Sets an overvoltage threshold above below which the line and bus voltage must be to satisfy the Check Sync.
Page 130 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-52 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. 132 V 0.5 V Live Bus 2 32 V Bus 2 is considered Live with voltage above this setting. 132 V 0.5 V Dead Bus 2 13 V...
Page 131 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-53 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. CB1 CS2 Status Disabled Enabled or Dis abled Setting to enable or disable the stage 2 synchronism check elements for auto-reclosing and manual closing CB1.
Page 132 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-54 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. 120 V 0.5 V CB2 CS1 Vdiff 6.5 V Check Synch Voltage differential setting decides that stage 1 System Check Synchronism logic for CB2 is blocked if Vdiff>...
Page 133 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-55 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. CB1M SC required Disabled Enabled or Disabled This setting determines whether a system check (e.g. live bus / dead line etc) is required for any manual (operator-controlled) closure of CB1.
Page 134 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-56 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 1.3.21 Auto-reclose function The auto-reclose functionality differs between the P543/P545 and the P544/P546 since the 543/P545 can onl y con trol one circu it breaker, whereas the P544/P546 can c ontrol two.
Page 135 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-57 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. Reclaim Time 180 s 600 s Sets the auto-reclose reclaim timer – the time after which the sequence counter will re to zero.
Page 136 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-58 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. N>2 to IN>4 Cells as for N>1 Above BAR 3 Phase/BAR 2 and 3 Phase/Allow Mult Phase AR BAR 3 Phase Setting that determines impact of any multiphase fault on AR operation.
Page 137 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-59 1.3.21.2 Auto-reclose function (P544/P546) The MiCOM P544/P546can be set to initiate auto-reclose for fault clearances by Zone 1 trips, pha se differential trips, distance aided tri ps, other distance zones, Aided DEF, irectional compar ison, p hase and...
Page 138 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-60 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. Leader by Menu, Leader by Leader Select By Leader by Menu Opto, Leader by Control Setting which determines how the preferred leader CB is selected - can be by menu setting, HMI command or by designated opto input.
Page 139 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-61 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. Discrim Time 100.0 ms 20 ms 5 second 10 ms Discrim Time = Discriminating Time. This is a setting which determines whether a fault on another phase (evolving or developing fault) after single phase trip and auto-reclose has been initiated by a single phase fault stops the single phase cycle and starts a three phase aut...
Page 140 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-62 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. 3P AR DT Shot 4 60.0 s 1.0 s 9999 s Dead time setting for three phase auto-reclose (4th shot). Follower Time 5.0 s 100.0 ms...
Page 141 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-63 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. No action, Block AR or ZPT AR Block AR Initiate AR Similar application to ZPT AR. Selection for Zone 3 trips. (Only in models with dis tanc e option)
Page 142 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-64 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. CB1L SC Shot 1 Disabled Enabled or Disabled This setting determines whether a system check (e.g. live bus / dead line etc) is required for the first shot reclosu re of CB1 as lea der.
Page 143 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-65 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. CB2L SC CS1 Disabled Enabled or Disabled This setting enables CB2 to auto-reclose as leader when the system satisfies all the System Check Synchronism Stage 1 criteria as defined under CB2 CS1 Status settings in the SYSTEM CHECKS column.
Page 144 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-66 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. CB2F SC Shot 1 Disabled Enabled or Disabled This setting determines whether a system chec k (e.g. live bus / dead lin e etc) is required for the first shot reclosure of CB2 as follower.
Page 145 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-67 Contr ol and supp ort settin The control and support settings are part of the ma in me nu and are use d to configure the elays global co nfiguratio n.
Page 146 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-68 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. Relay Address 1 Sets the first rear port re lay add ress. Plant Status 0000000000000010 Displays the circuit brea ker pla nt status.
Page 147 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-69 1.4.2 Circuit breaker control The System Checks functionality differs between the P543/P545 and the P544/P546 since the P543/P545 can only co ntrol one circuit brea er, whereas the P544/P 546 ca n cont rol two.
Page 148 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-70 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. Total Re-closures Data Displays the number of successful re-closures. Reset Total A/R No, Yes Allows user to reset the auto-reclo se counters.
Page 149 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-71 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. CB Healthy Time 0.01 s 9999 s 0.01 s A settable time delay included for manual closure of the circuit breaker. If the circuit breaker does not indicate a healthy condition in this time period following a close command then the relay will lockout and alarm.
Page 150 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-72 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. Res AROK by UI Enabled Enabled or Disabled If Enabled, this allows the successful auto-reclose signal to be reset by user interface command “Reset AROK Ind”.
Page 151 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-73 1.4.3 Date a nd time Displays the date and time as well as the battery con dition Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. Date/Time Data Displays the relay’s current date and time. IRIG-B Sync.
Page 152 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-74 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. January, February, March, April, May, DST Start Month March June, July, August, September, October, November, December Setting to specify the month in which daylight saving time adjustment starts DST Start Mins 60 min 1425...
Page 153 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-75 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. C/S VT Primary 110.0 V 100 V 1000 kV Sets the check sync. voltage transformer input primary voltage. C/S VT Secondary 110.0 V 80 V 140 V...
Page 154 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-76 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 1.4.4.2 CT/VT ratios (P544/P54 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. Main VT Primary 110.0 V 100 V 1000 kV Sets the main voltage transformer input primary voltage. Main VT Sec’y 110.0 V 80 V...
Page 155 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-77 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. VTs Connected Yes or No To indicate if voltage tra nsform ers are connected to the relay. This MUST be set properly to ensure Pole Dead logic works correctly.
Page 156 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-78 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 nu text Default setting Available settings Flt Rec Extended Enabled Enabled or Disabled When this setting is disa bled , the fault record c ontains a snap shot of th e loca l, remot differential and bias currents taken 1 cycle after the trip.
Page 157 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-79 Menu text Default settings Available settings MEASUREMENT SETUP Distance Unit* km/miles This setting is used to select the unit of distance for fault location purposes, note that the length of the line is preserved when converting from km to miles and vice versa. Fault Location* Distance Distance/Ohms/% of Line...
Page 158 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-80 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 1.4.7.2 Communication s settings for IEC 60870-5-103 protocol Sett ing range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. COMMUNICATIONS RP1 Protocol IEC60870-5-103 Indicates the communications protocol that will be used on the rear communications port. RP1 Address This cell sets the unique address for the relay such that only one relay is accessed by master station software.
Page 159 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-81 1.4.7.3 Comm unications s ettings for DNP3.0 protocol Setting ra Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. COMMUNICATIONS RP1 Protocol DNP 3.0 Indicates the communic ations pr otocol that will be used on the rear communic ations po RP1 Address 65519...
Page 160 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-82 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 1.4.7.4 Communications settings for Ethernet port – IEC 61860 Setting ra Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. IEC 61850 NIC Protocol Indicates that IEC 61850 will be used on the rear Ethernet port. NIC MAC Address Ethernet MAC Address Indicates the MAC addre...
Page 161 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-83 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. Alarm, Event, None NIC Link Report Alarm Configures how a failed/unfitted network link (copper or fiber) is reported: Alarm - an alarm is raised for a failed link Event - an event is logged for a failed link None - nothing reported for a failed link NIC Link Timeout...
Page 162 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-84 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. RP2 Address This cell sets the unique address for the relay such that only one relay is accessed by master station software. RP2 Inactivity Timer 15 mins.
Page 163 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-85 Menu text Default setting Available settings Disabled, Test Mode, Test Mode Disabled Contacts Blocked The Test Mode menu cell is used to allow secondary injection testing to be performed on the relay without operation of the trip contacts.
Page 164 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-86 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 enu text Default setting Available settings IM64 Test Mode Disabled Disabled or Enabled When the Enable command in this cell is issued the DDB set for op eration (set to ‘1’) in the ‘Test Pattern’...
Page 165 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-87 etting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. No C B Ops. Main 10000 Sets the threshold for num ber of circuit breaker operations maintenance alarm, indicating when preventative mai ntenance is due.
Page 166 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-88 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. 24 - 27, 30 - 34, 48 - 54, 110 - 125, Opto Input 2 - 32 24 - 27 220 - 250 Each opto input can individually be set to a nominal voltage value if custom is selected for the global setti...
Page 167 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-89 1.4.12 Control input configuration Instead of operating the control inputs as described in the above section, they coul d also be set to perform a p re-define d control functio n.
Page 168 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-90 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. Fn. Key 2 to 10 Unlock/Enable Disable, Lock, Unlock/Enable Status Setting to activate function key. The ‘Lock ’ setting allows a function key output that is set to toggle mode to be locked in its current ac tive position.
Page 169 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-91 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. SNTP PARAMETERS SNTP Server 1 Data Displays the IP address of the primary SNTP server. SNTP Server 2 Data Displays the IP address of the secondary SNTP server. IEC61850 SCL IED Name Data...
Page 170 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-92 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 1.4.16 Direct access (breaker con trol and “hotkeys”) The Di rect Access keys a re the 0 and 1 keys situated directly below the LCD display. Th user may as sign the fun ction of th ese two keys, to signal direct c...
Page 171 Settings P54x/EN ST/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (ST) 4-93 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. Analog. Channel 2 As above Analog. Channel 3 As above A Analog. Channel 4 As above B Analog. Channel 5 As above C Analog.
Page 172 P54x/EN ST/La4 Settings (ST) 4-94 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546...
Page 173: P54X/En Op/La4
Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 OPERATION Date: March 2009 Hardware Suffix: Software Version: 45 (P543/4/5/6 without Distance) 55 (P543/4/5/6 with Distance) Connection Diagrams: 10P54302 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54303 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54400 10P54404 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54405 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54502 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54503 (SH 1 to 2)
Page 174 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 175 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-1 CONTENTS (OP) 5- OPERATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS Phase differential characteristics 1.1.1 Time alignment of current vectors 1.1.1.1 Time alignment of current vectors without GPS input (traditional technique) 1.1.1.2 Time alignment of current vectors with GPS input (all models) 1.1.2 Capacitive charging current (all models)
Page 176 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-2 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 1.13 Quadrilateral phase resistive reaches (Distance option only) 1.14 Quadrilateral ground resistive reaches (Distance option only) 1.15 Advanced distance elements zone settings (Distance option only) 1.15.1 Phase fault zone settings (Distance option only) 1.15.2 Ground fault zone settings (Distance option only) 1.15.3...
Page 177 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-3 1.23.10 Aided DEF ground fault scheme - permissive overreach (Distance option only) 1.23.11 Aided DEF ground fault scheme – blocking (Distance option only) 1.23.12 Delta scheme POR - permissive overreach transfer trip (Distance option only) 1.23.13 Delta blocking scheme (Distance option only) 1.24 Zone 1 extension and loss of load schemes (Distance option only)
Page 178 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 2.1.8 P590 Series optical fiber to electrical interface units 2.1.9 Multiplexer link with G.703 electrical interface using auxiliary optical fibers and type P591 interface 2.1.10 Multiplexer link with V.35 electrical interface using auxiliary optical fibers and type P592 interface 2.1.11 Multiplexer link with X.21 electrical interface using auxiliary optical fibers and type P593...
Page 179 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-5 Current transformer supervision 3.2.1 Differential CTS (no need of local voltage measurements to declare CTS) 3.2.2 Standard CTS (voltage dependant CTS no need of communications to declare CTS) 3.2.3 CTS blocking Transformer magnetizing inrush detector Function keys...
Page 180 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-6 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 4.1.5.2 AR CB unhealthy (latched) (P543/P545) 4.1.5.3 AR lockout (self reset) (P543/P545) 4.1.6 Auto-reclose logic operating sequence (P543/P545) 4.1.7 Main operating features (P543/P545) 4.1.7.1 Auto-reclose modes (P543/P545) 4.1.7.2 Auto-reclose initiation (P543/P545) 4.1.7.3 Auto-reclose inhibit following manual close (P543/P545) 4.1.7.4...
Page 181 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-7 5.6.1 Time delayed and high speed auto-reclosing (P544/P546) 5.6.2 Auto-reclose logic inputs (P544/P546) 5.6.2.1 Circuit breaker healthy (P544/P546) 5.6.2.2 Inhibit auto-reclose (P544/P546) 5.6.2.3 Block auto-reclose (P544/P546) 5.6.2.4 Reset lockout (P544/P546) 5.6.2.5 Pole discrepancy (P544/P546) 5.6.2.6...
Page 182 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-8 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 P544/P546 CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL AND AUTO-RECLOSE FIGURES (AR FIGURES) P544/P546 CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL AND AUTO-RECLOSE LOGIC: INTERNAL SIGNAL DEFIN ITIONS FIGURES Figure 1 Relay bias characteristic Figure 2 Differential logic diagram Figure 3 Propagation delay measurement Figure 4...
Page 183 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-9 Figure 35 Aided tripping logic Figure 36 Permissive underreach transfer trip scheme (PUR) (Distance option only) Figure 37 PUR (Distance option only) Figure 38 Permissive overreach transfer trip scheme (POR) (Distance option only) Figure 39 Figure 40 Distance blocking scheme (BOP) (Distance option only)
Page 184 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-10 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Figure 77 Example assignment of signals within the PSL Figure 78 Triangulated InterMiCOM64 application Figure 79 Permissive intertrip Figure 80 VTS logic Figure 81 Differential CTS Figure 82 Voltage dependant CTS principle scheme Figure 83 Standard CTS Figure 84...
Page 185 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-11 Figure 119 Auto-relose timing diagram leader/follower (3ph) Figure 120 Synchro check functionality (P544/P546) AR FIGURES Figure 1 Circuit breaker 1 - state monitor Figure 2 Circuit breaker 2 - state monitor Figure 3 CB1 &...
Page 186 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-12 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Figure 41 AR shots counters Figure 42 CB2 AR shots counters Figure 43 CB1 circuit breaker control Figure 44 CB2 circuit breaker control Figure 45 CB1 lead 3PAR system check Figure 46 CB2 lead 3PAR system check Figure 47...
Page 187 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-13 OPERATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS The MiCOM P54x is a line protection relay that includes phase differential protection on a per phase basis and optionally comprehensive full scheme distance protection. Each one of these protection functions can be selected to work separately or simultaneously.
Page 188 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-14 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 The characteristic is determined by four protection settings: s1 The basic differential current setting which determines the minimum pick-up level of the relay.  The lower percentage bias setting used when the bias current is below s2.
Page 189 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-15 1.1.1 Time alignment of current vectors 1.1.1.1 Time alignment of current vectors without GPS input (traditional technique) This section relates to P54x relays when the GPS synchronization is not used. To calculate differential current between line ends it is necessary that the current samples from each end are taken at the same moment in time.
Page 190 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-16 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Since relays A and B are identical, relay B also sends out data messages to end A. Assume relay B sends out a data message at tB3. The message therefore contains the time tag tB3.
Page 191 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-17 If the link fails in one direction, say between the transmitter at node B and the receiver at node C, the self-healing ring can continue to transfer signals from node B to node C via the standby route through nodes B, A, F, E, D and then C (obviously a longer path).
Page 192 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-18 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 l y A l y B Figure 5 Data transmission Relay A can measure the total elapsed time = (tA* - tA1). This equals Note : the sum of the propagation delay times tp1 and tp2, the delay in sending out the initial message ta, and the delay time tc+td at end B.
Page 193 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-19 1.1.2 Capacitive charging current (all models) The charging current of a line or cable will be seen as differential current. If this current is of a sufficiently high magnitude, as is the case for cables and long feeders, then relay maloperation could occur.
Page 194 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-20 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 When applying a three end scheme with ends local (L), remote 1 (R1) and remote 2 (R2), the differential current is calculated as follows: d = L + R1 + R2 - (jVL Bs/3) - (jVR1 Bs/3) - (jV R2 Bs/3) d = {L - (jVL Bs/3) } + {...
Page 195 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-21 Flux, j Magnetising current, P1006ENa Figure 7 Transformer magnetizing characteristic Under normal steady state conditions, the magnetizing current associated with the operating flux level is relatively small (usually less than 1% of rated current). However, if a transformer winding is energized at a voltage zero, with no remnant flux, the flux level during the first voltage cycle (2 x normal max.
Page 196 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-22 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 - jm w h o P1007ENa Figure 8 Magnetizing inrush waveforms 1.1.4.2 Phase correction and zero sequence current filtering To compensate for any phase shift between two windings of a transformer, it is necessary to provide phase correction.
Page 197 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-23 igita c nicati n c anne Re a 1 Re a 2 Recei ed Recei ed diff diff P100 P100 Figure 9 Need for zero-sequence current filtering 1.1.5 3 to 2 terminal reconfiguration The P54x relays can be configured for the protection of two or three terminal lines.
Page 198 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-24 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 1.1.6 Mesh corner and 1½ breaker switched substations If differential protection is applied in a mesh corner or 1½ breaker switched substation, a P544 or P546 should be preferred to use it as they do have two independent CT inputs and therefore each one generates its own restrain.
Page 199 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-25 1.1.7 Stub bus protection The P54x relays include a facility to provide stub bus protection. When the line isolator is open, an auxiliary contact from the isolator can energize an input on the relay to enable this protection.
Page 200 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-26 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 The minimum operating current is therefore a function of the s1 and k1 settings. With k1 set to 30% and Is1 set to 0.2 pu, the minimum operating current will be: ...
Page 201 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-27 1.5.2 Tripping mode - selection of single or three phase tripping This selects whether instantaneous trips are permitted as Single pole, or will always be 3 pole. Protection elements considered as “instantaneous” are those normally set to trip with no intentional time delay, i.e.: Differential, directional earth/ground DEF aided scheme and if fitted, Zone 1 distance and distance channel aided scheme.
Page 202 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-28 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 INTSIG Phase A Undercurrent Operation 20ms INTSIG Phase A Undervoltage Operation & DDB Pole Dead A (892) DDB CB Open A ph (904) & INTSIG Phase B Undercurrent Operation 20ms INTSIG Phase B Undervoltage Operation &...
Page 203 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-29 INTSIG Phase A Undercurrent Operation 20ms INTSIG Phase A Undervoltage Operation & DDB Pole Dead A (892) DDB CB 1 Open A ph (904) & & DDB CB2 Open A ph (912) INTSIG Phase B Undercurrent Operation 20ms INTSIG Phase B Undervoltage Operation...
Page 204 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-30 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546  If the ratio: I MUTUAL/IN is less than the ‘Mutual Cutoff’ setting, then full mutual compensation is applied to all distance zones, and the fault locator.  If the ratio: I MUTUAL/IN is greater than the ‘Mutual Cutoff’ setting, then no mutual compensation is applied.
Page 205 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-31 The protection elements are directionalized as follows:  Zones 1, 2 and 3 - Directional forward zones, as used in conventional three zone distance schemes. Note that Zone 1 can be extended to Zone 1X when required in zone 1 extension schemes.
Page 206 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-32 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546  The faulted phase impedance must appear within a tripping (measuring) zone, corresponding to the phase selection. Five independent zones of protection are provided. The tripping zones are mho circles or quadrilateral, and selected independently for phase, and ground faults.
Page 207 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-33 Any existing trip decision is not reset under this condition. After the Note: first cycle following a selection, the phase selector is only permitted to change to a selection involving additional phases. On double phase to ground faults, only the appropriate phase-phase elements are enabled.
Page 208 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-34 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Under conditions on load with high levels of sub-synchronous frequencies, it is necessary to increase the I phase selector threshold from its default (4% In) to prevent sporadic operation. This is automatically performed by the relay, which will self-adjust the threshold to prevent operation upon the noise signals, whilst still maintaining a high sensitivity to faults.
Page 209 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-35 Key: Zs Source impedance behind the relay location The MiCOM P54x does not allow the polarizing to be selected as entirely self polarized, or entirely memory polarized. Vpol always contains the directly measured self-polarized voltage, onto which a percentage of the pre-fault memory voltage can be added.
Page 210 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-36 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 1.11.2 Offset Mho (Distance option only) If the Zone 3 offset is enabled then it uses no memory polarizing and has a fixed reverse offset from the origin of a distance polar diagram. Characteristic angle and residual compensation are as per the forward settings.
Page 211 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-37 1.12.2 Offset quadrilateral (Distance option only) This characteristic is used for Zone 3 when the offset is enabled. Figure 20 Offset quadrilateral for zone 3 (Distance option only) It is formed from two reactance lines and two resistive reach blinders. The upper reactance line is arranged to operate for faults below it and the lower for fault above it.
Page 212 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-38 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 A reactance line is formed by the phase comparison between an operating signal V/I - Z, which is the same as that used for the equivalent mho element, and a polarizing signal Iref/I. Where: is the fault voltage ...
Page 213 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-39 1.12.4 Right hand resistive reach line (Distance option only) Figure 22 Resistive reach line (load blinder) (Distance option only)  A load blinder is formed by the phase comparison between an operating signal V/ - R and a polarizing signal Z Where:...
Page 214 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-40 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Using the Advanced setting mode, the user has decided to set all the zones him/herself, and must complete all the reach and residual/mutual compensation settings on a per zone basis.
Page 215 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-41 1.15.3 Distance zone sensitivities (Distance option only) When the Simple setting mode is selected, the minimum current sensitivity still applies, but the value is automatically calculated and applied based on the data entered into the simple settings fields.
Page 216 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-42 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 1.16 Conventional voltage transformer and capacitor VT applications (Distance option only) The MiCOM P54x achieves fast trip times due an optimized counting strategy. For faults on angle and up to 80% of the set reach of the zone, a counter increments quickly to reach the level at which a trip is issued.
Page 217 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-43 1.17 Load blinding (load avoidance) (Distance option only) Load blinders are provided for both phase and ground fault distance elements, to prevent misoperation (mal-tripping) for heavy load flow. The purpose is to configure a blinder envelope which surrounds the expected worst case load limits, and to block tripping for any impedance measured within the blinded region.
Page 218 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-44 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Ground Elements & & & & & & & Phase Elements & & & Signal Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone P Zone 4 Zone x Ground Block Zone x Phase Block Zone x AN Zone x BN...
Page 219 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-45 1.19 Power swing detection, alarming and blocking (Distance option only) 1.19.1 Detection of power swings (Distance option only) A power swing may cause the impedance presented to a distance relay to move away from the normal load area and into one or more of its tripping characteristics.
Page 220 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-46 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 1.19.2 Actions upon power swing detection (Distance option only) Once a power swing is detected the following actions occur:  Distance elements are blocked on selected zones providing blocking is enabled ...
Page 221 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-47 Other setting possibilities are:  Selection of PSB as “Indication” only will raise an alarm, without blocking any zones.  The PSB Unblock Dly function allows for any power swing block to be removed after a set period of time.
Page 222 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-48 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 1.20.1.1 Characteristic (Distance option only) Both polygon characteristics are independent and have independent settings for their respective reactance and resistive reaches. Predictive Out of step trip Recoverable swing Out of step trip ...
Page 223 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-49 1.20.1.2 Operating principle (Distance option only) The Out of Step detection algorithm is based on measuring the speed of positive sequence impedance passing through the set ∆Z region. As soon as measured positive sequence impedance touches the outer polygon, a timer is started.
Page 224 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-50 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Figure 28 Out of step algorithm (Distance option only) 1.21 Switch on to fault (SOTF) and trip on reclose (TOR) (Distance option only) The settings for SOTF and TOR are included in the menu column TRIP ON CLOSE (TOC) within the MiCOM P54x relay.
Page 225 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-51 Figure 29 Trip on close (Distance option only)
Page 226 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-52 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (559) DDB:QuarterCycleOV Ph & DDB:Phase_A_Undercurrent (864) 20ms DDB:QuarterCycleOV PhB (560) & DDB:CNV Active(556) DDB:Phase_B_Undercurrent (865) DDB:Phase_C_Undercurrent (866) & DDB:QuarterCycleOV PhC (561) DDB:CNV Active (556) & DDB:TOR Active (878) DDB:CNV TOR Trip (557) - >...
Page 227 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-53 1.21.2 Trip on reclose mode (Distance option only) The settings applied are as follows: TOR Status With this feature Enabled, for a period following circuit breaker closure, the relay operates in Trip on Reclose mode. Three pole instantaneous tripping occurs for any fault detected by the selected zones or/and ‘Current No Volt’...
Page 228 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-54 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 1.22.1 DEF zero sequence polarization with “virtual current polarizing” (Distance option only) With earth fault protection, the polarizing (directional reference) signal requires to be representative of the earth fault condition. As residual voltage is generated during earth fault conditions, this quantity is commonly used to polarize the directional decision of DEF elements.
Page 229 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-55 The directional criteria with negative sequence polarization are given below: Directional forward < (angle(I2) - angle(V2+180 ) - RCA) < 90 Directional reverse > (angle(I2) - angle(V2+180 ) - RCA) > 90 1.22.3 Delta directional comparison principle and setup (Distance option only) The characteristic angle set in this section is also used by the...
Page 230 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-56 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 I F1 Z S1 Z L1 Z R1 I F/3 I F2 Z S2 Z L2 Z R2 voltage generator represents voltage I F0 change at fault Z S0 Z L0 Z R0 location...
Page 231 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-57 1.22.4 Delta directional decision (Distance option only) On fault inception, delta quantities are generated, and it is then simple for the relay to determine the direction of the fault: Forward fault - Delta V is a decrease in voltage, and so is in the negative sense;...
Page 232 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-58 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 1.23 Channel aided schemes (Distance option only) The MiCOM P54x offers two sets of aided channel (“pilot”) schemes, which may be operated in parallel. Aided Scheme 1 - May be keyed by distance and/or DEF and/or delta directional comparison;...
Page 233 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-59 Figure 32 Aided scheme logic overview (Distance option only) The full Logic Diagrams of the Send, Receive and Aided Trip Logic are now attached here, for reference. It is not necessary to understand the entire logic in order to apply any scheme, as in later sections abbreviated scheme diagrams are available.
Page 234 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-60 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Figure 33 Send logic (Distance option only) Figure 34 Receive logic (Distance option only)
Page 235 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-61 Figure 35 Aided tripping logic 1.23.1 Distance scheme PUR - permissive underreach transfer trip (Distance option only) To provide fast fault clearance for all faults, both transient and permanent, along the length of the protected circuit, it is necessary to use a signal aided tripping scheme.
Page 236 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-62 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Figure 36 shows the simplified scheme logic. Send logic: Zone 1 Permissive trip logic: Zone 2 plus Channel Received Figure 36 Permissive underreach transfer trip scheme (PUR) (Distance option only) Detailed logic is shown in Figure 37, as follows: Figure 37 PUR (Distance option only) 1.23.2...
Page 237 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-63 Listed below are some of the main features/requirements for a permissive overreaching scheme:  The scheme requires a duplex signaling channel to prevent possible relay maloperation due to spurious keying of the signaling equipment. This is necessary due to the fact that the signaling channel is keyed for faults external to the protected line.
Page 238 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-64 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Figure 38 Permissive overreach transfer trip scheme (POR) (Distance option only) Detailed logic is shown in Figure 39, as follows: The DDB Any Trip (522) feeds into a 100 ms delay on drop-off timer, Note: which in turn leads to signal sending.
Page 239 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-65 Figure 39 POR 1.23.3 Permissive overreach trip reinforcement (Distance option only) The send logic in the POR scheme is done in such a way that for any trip command at the local end, the relay sends a channel signal to the remote end(s) in order to maximize the chances for the fault to be isolated at all ends.
Page 240 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-66 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 1.23.4 Permissive overreach scheme weak infeed features (Distance option only) Weak infeed logic can be enabled to run in parallel with the POR schemes. Two options are available: WI Echo, and WI Tripping. (Note: Special stub-end transformer Weak Infeed is covered in section 1.37) Weak Infeed Echo...
Page 241 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-67 Permissive Permissive Alarm System condition channel Loss of guard trip allowed generated received Healthy Line Internal Line Fault Yes, during a Yes, delayed on Unblock 150 ms window pickup by 150 ms Yes, delayed on Signaling Anomaly pickup by 150 ms...
Page 242 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-68 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Z ne Z ne 3 Z ne 2 Z ne 1 Z ne 1 Z ne 2 Z ne 3 Z ne Fast Z Fast Z & & & &...
Page 243 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-69 B o l Figure 41 Example of fault current reverse of direction 1.23.8 Permissive overreach schemes current reversal guard (Distance option only) The current reversal guard incorporated in the POR scheme logic is initiated when the reverse looking Zone 4 elements operate on a healthy line.
Page 244 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-70 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Figure 43 Blocking 2 (Distance option only) The relative merits of Blocking 1 and Blocking 2 are discussed in the Application Notes. 1.23.10 Aided DEF ground fault scheme - permissive overreach (Distance option only) Figure 44 shows the element reaches, and Figure 45 the simplified scheme logic.
Page 245 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-71 DE - DE - DE - DE - DE Bu DE Bu DE Bu DE Bu DE DM DE DM Figure 45 Aided DEF (ground) permissive scheme logic (Distance option only) 1.23.11 Aided DEF ground fault scheme –...
Page 246 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-72 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 The scheme has the same features/requirements as the corresponding distance scheme and provides sensitive protection for high resistance earth faults. Where t is shown in the diagram this signifies the time delay associated with an element. To allow time for a blocking signal to arrive, a short time delay on aided tripping must be used.
Page 247 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-73 DIR REV DIR FWD Z (T) Z (T) DIR FWD DIR REV DIR FWD DIR FWD Open Open Signalling Signalling & & Equipment Equipment & & DIR FWD DIR FWD Trip H Trip G TZ(T)
Page 248 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-74 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546  A current reversal guard timer is included in the signal send logic to prevent unwanted trips of the relay on the healthy circuit, during current reversal situations on a parallel circuit.
Page 249 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-75 1.24.1 Zone 1 extension scheme (Distance option only) Auto-reclosure is widely used on radial overhead line circuits to re-establish supply following a transient fault. A Zone 1 extension scheme may therefore be applied to a radial overhead feeder to provide high speed protection for transient faults along the whole of the protected line.
Page 250 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-76 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Figure 51 Zone 1 extension 1.24.2 Loss of load accelerated tripping (LoL) (Distance option only) The loss of load accelerated trip logic is shown in abbreviated form in Figure 52. The loss of load logic provides fast fault clearance for faults over the whole of a double end fed protected circuit for all types of fault, except three phase.
Page 251 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-77 & & Trip & P11 6 Na Figure 52 Loss of load accelerated trip scheme (Distance option only) For circuits with load tapped off the protected line, care must be taken in setting the loss of load feature to ensure that the I<...
Page 252 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-78 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Figure 53 Loss of load (Distance option only) 1.25 Phase fault overcurrent protection Phase fault overcurrent protection is provided as a form of back-up protection that could be:  Permanently disabled ...
Page 253 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-79 The IEEE/US IDMT curves conform to the following formula:      t = TD x      –1 = Operation time  = Constant ...
Page 254 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-80 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Curve description Standard S constant Moderately Inverse IEEE 4.85 Very Inverse IEEE 21.6 Extremely Inverse IEEE 29.1 Inverse 5.95 Short Time Inverse 2.261 1.25.2 Directional overcurrent protection The phase fault elements of the MiCOM P54x relays are internally polarized by the quadrature phase-phase voltages, as shown in the table below: Phase of protection Operate current...
Page 255 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-81 Figure 54 Directional overcurrent logic Any of the four overcurrent stages may be configured to be directional noting that IDMT characteristics are only selectable on the first two stages. When the element is selected as directional, a VTS Block option is available.
Page 256 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-82 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 1.27.1 Single time constant characteristic This characteristic is used to protect cables, dry type transformers (e.g. type AN), and capacitor banks. The thermal time characteristic is given by:  ...
Page 257 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-83 Overall, the dual time constant characteristic provided within the relay serves to protect the winding insulation from ageing, and to minimize gas production by overheated oil. The thermal model does not compensate for the effects of ambient Note: temperature change.
Page 258 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-84 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 A feature also exists whereby the protection can be enabled upon failure of the differential protection communication channel (not applicable to sensitive earth fault). Earth fault Overcurrent IN> can be set to: ...
Page 259 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-85 IDG Is Setting Range IDG Time Setting Range I/IN> P2242ENa Figure 56 IDG characteristic 1.29 Directional earth fault protection As stated in the previous sections, each of the four stages of earth fault protection may be set to directional if required.
Page 260 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-86 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Figure 57 Directional EF with neutral voltage polarization (single stage) 1.30.1 Negative sequence polarization (Not for SEF) In certain applications, the use of residual voltage polarization of DEF may either be not possible to achieve, or problematic.
Page 261 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-87 Figure 58 Directional EF with negative sequence polarization (single stage) The directional criteria with negative sequence polarization is given below: Directional forward -90° < (angle(I2) - angle(V2 + 180°) - RCA) < 90° Directional reverse -90°...
Page 262 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-88 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 I2>2 Start (DDB 568) 2nd stage started when high I2>3 Start (DDB 569) 3rd stage started when high I2>4 Start (DDB 570) 4th stage started when high I2>1 Trip (DDB 571) 1st stage tripped when high I2>2 Trip (DDB 572) 2nd stage tripped when high...
Page 263 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-89 1.31.1 Directionalizing the negative phase sequence overcurrent element Directionality is achieved by comparison of the angle between the negative phase sequence voltage and the negative phase sequence current and the element may be selected to operate in either the forward or reverse direction.
Page 264 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-90 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 The logic diagram for the first stage undervoltage function is shown in Figure 62. Figure 62 Undervoltage - single and three phase tripping mode (single stage) Undervoltage protection is phase segregated, but the operation of any Note: phase is mapped to 3 phase tripping in the default PSL.
Page 265 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-91 Figure 63 Overvoltage - single and three phase tripping mode (single stage) Phase overvoltage protection is phase segregated, but the operation Note: of any phase is mapped to 3 phase tripping in the default PSL. Each stage of Overvoltage protection may be disabled by a DDB (473 or 474) Inhibit Vx>...
Page 266 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-92 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 The relay uses the {A,B,C,D] transmission line equivalent model given the following parameters:     Total Impedance     Total Susceptance Line Length The remote voltage is calculated using the following equations: ...
Page 267 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-93 1.34 Residual overvoltage (neutral displacement) protection The NVD element within the MiCOM P54x is of two stage design, each stage having separate voltage and time delay settings. Stage 1 may be set to operate on either an IDMT or DT characteristic, whilst stage 2 may be set to DT only.
Page 268 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-94 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 1.35.1 Reset mechanisms for breaker fail timers It is common practice to use low set undercurrent elements in protection relays to indicate that circuit breaker poles have interrupted the fault or load current, as required. This covers the following situations: ...
Page 269 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-95 The complete breaker fail logic is illustrated in Figure 65, Figure 66 and Figure 68. Figure 65 CB failure for P543 and P545 models...
Page 270 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-96 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Figure 66 CB1 failure logic for P544 and P546 models...
Page 271 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-97 Enable SET: & CB Fail 1 Status Disbale Enable & SET: CB Fail 2 Status Disbale DDB External Trip A (479) SET: CB Fail 1 Timer INTSIG Any Trip Phase A &...
Page 272 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-98 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 1.37 Frequency protection The relay includes 4 stages of underfrequency and 2 stages of overfrequency protection to facilitate load shedding and subsequent restoration. The underfrequency stages may be optionally blocked by an undervoltage level (setting CB FAIL & P.DEAD/POLEDEAD VOLTAGE/V<).
Page 273 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-99 When enabled, the following signals are set by the under/overfrequency logic according to the status of the monitored functions. F<1 Timer Block (DDB 1149) Block Underfrequency Stage 1 Timer F<2 Timer Block (DDB 1150) Block Underfrequency Stage 2 Timer...
Page 274 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-100 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 1.38 Independent rate of change of frequency protection [81R] In the load shedding scheme below, it is assumed under falling frequency conditions that by shedding a stage of load, the system can be stabilized at frequency f2. For slow rates of decay, this can be achieved using the underfrequency protection element set at frequency f1 with a suitable time delay.
Page 275 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-101 When enabled, the following signals are set by the df/dt logic according to the status of the monitored function. df/dt> Inhibit (DDB 592) Inhibit all 4 stages when high df/dt>1 Tmr.
Page 276 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-102 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 In such a stub-end feeding case, relay R2 may experience some overreach in the case of double-phase to ground faults. This is caused by the unusual current distribution making the MiCOM P54x detect a single phase fault condition (and potential single pole tripping only in single pole tripping applications).
Page 277 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-103 COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN RELAYS Communications link options A number of communications options are available, for the communication channels between P54x system ends. The various connection options are shown below. Choosing between each of these options will depend on the type of communications equipment that is available.
Page 278 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-104 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 2.1.4 Direct optical fiber link, 1550 nm single-mode fiber The relays are connected directly using two 1550 nm single-mode fibers, type 9/125 m for each signaling channel. BFOC/2.5 type fiber optic connectors are used. P540 P540 Optical fibre...
Page 279 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-105 One of the checks performed on the communications link is a check on the calculated propagation delay for each data message. During normal operation the difference in calculated time should be minimal (possible delays being introduced by multiplexers or other intermediary communication equipment).
Page 280 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-106 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Commu Commu C l ul l y m lo > P1031ENb Figure 73 Switched communication network...
Page 281 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-107 Figure 74 Transient bias characteristic 2.1.7 Switched communication networks with permanent or semi-permanent split routings MiCOM P54x relays, utilizing timing information from the GPS system, are suitable for use on switched communication signaling channels for the differential protection.
Page 282 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-108 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 The units are housed in a 20TE MiCOM case. Fiber optic connections to the unit are made through BFOC/2.5 type connectors, more commonly known as ‘ST’ connectors. The optical characteristics are similar to the P54x 850 nm multi-mode fiber optic interface (refer to optical budgets in chater P54x/EN/AP).
Page 283 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-109 The switch labeled ‘Clockswitch’ is provided to invert the V.35 transmit timing clock signal if required. The switch labeled ‘Fiber-optic Loopback’ is provided to allow a test loopback of the communication signal across the fiber optic terminals.
Page 284 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-110 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 ITU-T designation Description Connector pin Direction Case earth Common return Transmit data A From P593 Transmit data B From P593 Receive data A To P593 Receive data B To P593 Signal element timing A To P593 Signal element timing B...
Page 285 In cases where the calculated voltage exceeds, typically 60% of the relay/modem isolation level, additional isolation must be added. ALSTOM Grid offer the PCM-FLÜ 10 kV or 20 kV isolating transformers for use in conjunction with such baseband modems. The choice of 10 kV or 20 kV will depend upon the predicted magnitude of the induced voltage.
Page 286 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-112 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 2.1.12.3 Baseband modem propagation delay The use of a baseband modem will bring an additional propagation delay time that needs to be taken into account. For a 2-wire connection to the Campus modem the additional delay will be 1.02 ms.
Page 287 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-113 The MiCOM P591 communications interface units do not require any special setting up and the communications should be now configured. 2.1.13 Protection communications scheme set-up The Scheme Set-up setting selects the connection between the system ends. A two ended system may have a single communication channel between the ends (2 Terminal option) or two independent communication channels to achieve dual redundancy (Dual Redundant option).
Page 288 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-114 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Relay A Relay B Address Group 10 10-A 10-B Address Group 11 11-A 11-B Address Group 12 12-A 12-B Address Group 13 13-A 13-B Address Group 14 14-A 14-B Address Group 15 15-A 15-B...
Page 289 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-115 For three relays to work together as a protection system, their addresses must be in the same group and they should be assigned separately with addresses A, B and C. They must also have a fixed connection configuration, as shown in Figure 75, in which channel 1 of one relay is connected to channel 2 of another relay.
Page 290 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-116 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 The operation of the change configuration logic is as follows: 1. The configuration setting is changed 2. The relay detects the change in setting and attempts to implement the new setting 3.
Page 291 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-117 5. If no messages arrive from either end then after one second the relay will change to the configuration that was last selected, i.e. the configuration before power down. Once messages begin to arrive again, the relay will check them for validity against the current scheme.
Page 292 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-118 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Speed Permissive faster Blocking slower high Direct Dependability Security Intertrip P1342ENa Figure 76 Pictorial comparison of operating modes This diagram shows that a blocking signal should be fast and dependable; a direct intertrip signal should be very secure and a permissive signal is an intermediate compromise of speed, security and dependability.
Page 293 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-119 2.2.3 Functional assignment The settings to control the mode of the intertrip signals are made using the relay’s menu software. In addition to this, it is necessary to assign InterMiCOM input and output signals in the relay Programmable Scheme Logic (PSL) editor.
Page 294 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-120 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 P1735ENc Figure 78 Triangulated InterMiCOM64 application If InterMiCOM is working as standalone feature (i.e. Differential protection is disabled and InterMiCOM is enabled), a pass-through feature allows the scheme to remain in service in case of one channel outage.
Page 295 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-121 2.3.1.3 InterMiCOM and differential communications The Differential function can be globally enabled or disabled using the CONFIGURATION /Phase Diff/ Enabled-Disabled setting. If the Differential function is enabled, communication messages between the relays will have the complete differential format including currents and additional bias.
Page 296 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-122 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 2.3.3 Clock source A clock source is required to synchronize data transmissions between the system ends. This may be provided either by the P54x relays (internal) or may be a function of the telecommunications equipment (external).
Page 297 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-123 2.3.8 Communications fail mode The Communications Fail Mode is used to select the channel(s) responsible for raising the communication alarm when configured for dual redundant communications. Three options are available: ‘Ch 1 Failure’, ‘Ch 2 Failure’, Ch1 or Ch 2 Fail’ and Ch1 and Ch 2 Fail’. If ‘Ch 1 Failure’...
Page 298 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-124 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 OPERATION OF NON PROTECTION FUNCTIONS The protection functionality of the P543, P544, P545, and P546 are very similar, and a common operational description can be applied. For the non-protection functions, some of the functionality is the same and, similarly, a common operational description can be applied.
Page 299 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-125 3.1.1 Loss of one or two phase voltages The VTS feature within the relay operates on detection of negative phase sequence (nps) voltage without the presence of negative phase sequence current. This gives operation for the loss of one or two phase voltages.
Page 300 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-126 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 3.1.4 VTS logic The relay may respond as follows, on operation of any VTS element:  VTS set to provide alarm indication only;  Optional blocking of voltage dependent protection elements; ...
Page 301 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-127 This scheme is also able to correctly operate under very low load or even no load conditions, by the combination of time delayed signals derived from the DDB signals VTS Fast block and all Poles Dead, to generate the Block Distance DDB.
Page 302 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-128 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 There are two modes of operation, Indication and Restrain. In Indication mode, a CTS alarm is raised but no effect on tripping. In Restrain mode, the differential protection is blocked during 20 ms after CT failure detection and then the setting for the Current Differential is raised to above load current.
Page 303 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-129 Operation of the element will produce a time-delayed alarm visible on the LCD, an event record and a DDB 294: CT Fail Alarm, with an instantaneous block (DDB 928: CTS Block) for inhibition of protection elements see Figure 82 above.
Page 304 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-130 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 The Function Keys column has ‘Fn. Key n Mode’ cell which allows the user to configure the function key as either ‘Toggled’ or ‘Normal’. In the ‘Toggle’ mode the function key DDB signal output will remain in the set state until a reset command is given, by activating the function key on the next key press.
Page 305 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-131 Control inputs The control inputs function as software switches that can be set or reset either locally or remotely. These inputs can be used to trigger any function that they are connected to as part of the PSL.
Page 306 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-132 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 The CTRL. I/P LABELS column makes it possible to change the text associated with each individual control input. This text will be displayed when a control input is accessed by the hotkey menu, or it can be displayed in the PSL.
Page 307 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-133 3.8.1 Basic theory for ground faults Figure 84 shows a two-machine equivalent circuit of a faulted power system. P0124ENa Figure 84 Two-machine equivalent circuit From this diagram: Vp = mpZr + fRf …(equation 1) The fault location, m, can be found if f can be estimated allowing equation 1 to be solved.
Page 308 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-134 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 3.8.5 Obtaining the vectors Different sets of vectors are chosen depending on the type of fault identified by the phase selection algorithm. The calculation using equation 1 is applied for either a phase to ground fault or a phase to phase fault.
Page 309 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-135 i.e.: Phase advanced vector Vp =  Vp  [cos(s) + jsin(s) ] * [ sin(d) + jcos(d) ] =  Vp  [-sin(s-d) + jcos(s-d) ] Phase advanced vector pZr = ...
Page 310 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-136 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 SINGLE CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL : P543/P545 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION This section describes the P543/P545 operational control of a single circuit breaker. The circuit breaker control and monitoring in the P543/P545 provides single phase or three phase switching of a feeder controlled by a single circuit breaker Single and three phase auto-reclosing 4.1.1...
Page 311 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-137 4.1.2.4 Pole discrepancy (P543/P545) Circuit breakers with independent mechanisms for each pole normally incorporate a ‘phases not together’ or ‘pole discrepancy’ protection device which automatically trips all three phases if they are not all in the same position i.e. all open or all closed. During single pole auto-reclosing a pole discrepancy condition is deliberately introduced and the pole discrepancy device must not operate for this condition.
Page 312 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-138 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 4.1.4 Auto-reclose logic outputs (P543/P545) The following DDB signals can be masked to a relay contact in the PSL or assigned to a Monitor Bit in Commissioning Tests, to provide information about the status of the auto-reclose cycle.
Page 313 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-139 4.1.5.3 AR lockout (self reset) (P543/P545) The AR Lockout alarm indicates that the relay is in a lockout state and that further reclose attempts will not be made; see section 4.1.7.4 ‘AR Lockout’ for more details. This alarm can be reset using one of the reset lockout methods;...
Page 314 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-140 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Every time the relay trips the sequence counter is incremented by 1. The relay compares the Single Pole Shots and Three Pole Shots counter values to the sequence count. If the fault is single phase and the sequence count is greater than the Single Pole Shots setting then the relay will lockout.
Page 315 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-141 Figure 88 Auto-reclose timing diagram - fault with system synchronism Figure 89 Auto-reclose timing diagram - lockout for no checksynch 4.1.7 Main operating features (P543/P545) 4.1.7.1 Auto-reclose modes (P543/P545) The auto-reclose function has three operating modes: Single Pole Auto-reclose Three Pole Auto-reclose...
Page 316 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-142 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 4.1.7.2 Auto-reclose initiation (P543/P545) Auto-reclose is initiated from the internal protection of the relay.  By default, all “instantaneous” schemes will initiate auto-reclose, therefore current differential, Zone 1 distance, Aided Scheme 1, and Aided Scheme 2 will all initiate AR. ...
Page 317 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-143 4.1.7.6 System check on shot 1 (P543/P545) The SysChk on Shot 1 setting is used to Enable/Disable system checks for the first reclose after a 3 pole trip in an auto-reclose cycle. When the SysChk on Shot 1 is set to Disabled no system checks are required for the first reclose which may be preferred when high speed auto-reclose is applied to avoid the extra time for a system check.
Page 318 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-144 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 DDB CB Closed A ph (908) & DDB CB Closed B ph (909) & SET : DDB CB Closed C ph (910) Aute-reclose Inhibit Time Pulse to Start Timer DDB CB Closed 3 ph (907) &...
Page 319 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-145 SET Dead Time start Protection Op INTSIG Single Phase Trip & INTSIG Three Phase Trip INTSIG Single Pole ARIP & & INTSIG Sequence Count1 & & & & SET Dead Time start Protection reset Increment DDB Seq Counter = 0 (846)
Page 320 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-146 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 INTSIG SinglePoleARComplete SET: One pole dead time INTSIG ThreePoleARIP INTSIG SinglePhaseTrip & Enable & & SET: Single Pole A/R Disable DDB En 1pole reclose (449) DDB Pole Discrepancy (451) INTSIG ThreePhaseTrip INTSIG ARLockout DDB AR 1pole in prog (845)
Page 321 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-147 Figure 94 Auto-reclose close...
Page 322 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-148 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Figure 95 Auto-reclose lockout logic (P543/P545)
Page 323 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-149 INTSIG SinglePoleARIP INTSIG ThreePoleARIP & INTSIG SinglePhaseTrip INTSIG ThreePhaseTrip INTSIG ARLockout & INTSIG SequenceCount1 INTSIG SequenceCount2 INTSIG SequenceCount3 & INTSIG SequenceCount4 INTSIG HealthyWindow Enable SET: Single Pole A/R Disable DDB En 1 pole reclose (449) DDB Force 3 Pole (858) INTSIG Force 3 P...
Page 324 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-150 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Figure 98 Ddb pole discrepancy trip (P543/P545) System checks (including check synchronizer) (P543/P545) 4.2.1 Overview (P543/P545) In some situations it is possible for both “bus” and “line” sides of a circuit breaker to be live when the circuit breaker is open, for example at the ends of a feeder which has a power source at each end.
Page 325 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-151 4.2.2 VT selection (P543/P545) The MiCOM P543/P545 has a three phase Main VT input and a single phase Check Sync VT input. Depending on the primary system arrangement, the main three phase VT for the relay may be located on either the busbar side or the line side of the circuit breaker, with the check sync VT being located on the other side.
Page 326 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-152 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 4.2.5 Check sync 2 and system split (P543/P545) Check Sync 2 and System Split functions are included for situations where the maximum permitted slip frequency and phase angle for synchro check can change according to actual system conditions.
Page 327 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-153 If Check Sync Voltage Blocking is set to UV, UV + OV, UV + DiffV or UV + OV + DiffV, both line volts and bus volts magnitudes are > Check Sync Undervoltage setting If Check Sync Voltage Blocking is set to DiffV, UV + DiffV, OV + DiffV or UV + OV + DiffV, the voltage magnitude difference between line volts and bus volts is <...
Page 328 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-154 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 4.2.8 System split (P543/P545) For the System Split module to function: The System Checks setting must be Enabled. The SS Status setting must be Enabled. The module must be individually enabled, by activation of DDB signal System Split Enabled, mapped in PSL.
Page 329 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-155 Check Sync Stage 2 Limits Check Sync Stage 1 Limits Live Volts Rotating Vector Nominal Volts LINE Dead Volts System Split Limits P2131ENa Figure 99 Synchro check and synchro split functionality (P543/P545)
Page 330 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-156 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Enable/Disable System ‘System Checks’ Status Checks (DDB_SYSCHECKS_INACTIVE) Common Stage 1 Settings Settings Check Enable Stage 1 Check Sync OK Sync (DDB_CHECKSYNC_1_ENABLED) (DDB_CHECKSYNC_1_OK) Stage 1 Blocking Stage 2 Settings Enable Check Stage 2 Check Sync OK Sync...
Page 331 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-157 DDB_AR_Sys_Check_OK (899) DDB_CS1_OK (883) & SET: Check Sync 1 Close En DDB_CS2_OK (884) & SET: Check Sync 2 Close En SET: Live Line/Dead Bus close DDB_Line_Live (888) & INTSIG AR SysCheck_Ok DDB_Bus_Dead SET: Dead Line/Live Bus close DDB_Line_Dead (889)
Page 332 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-158 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 If any of the above conditions exist, an alarm will be issued after a 5s time delay. A normally open / normally closed output contact can be assigned to this function via the programmable scheme logic (PSL).
Page 333 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-159 4.5.1 Circuit breaker condition monitoring features (P543/P545) For each circuit breaker trip operation the relay records statistics as shown in the following table taken from the relay menu. The menu cells shown are counter values only. The Min./Max.
Page 334 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-160 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 INTSIG Phase A Current SET CUMULATIVE IA BROKEN In INTSIG Phase B Current SET CUMULATIVE IB BROKEN In INTSIG Phase C Current SET CUMULATIVE Ic BROKEN In DDB Trip 3ph (526) Note: Broken current totals shall not DDB ExternalTrip3ph (534) be incremented if the relay is in test...
Page 335 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-161 Figure 103 Circuit breaker condition monitoring - operation time (P543/P545)
Page 336 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-162 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Figure 104 CB monitoring (P543/P545) Circuit breaker control (P543/P545) The relay includes the following options for control of a single circuit breaker:  Local tripping and closing, via the relay menu or Hotkeys ...
Page 337 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-163 o ol o ol lo Figure 105 Remote control of circuit breaker (P543/P545) A manual trip will be permitted provided that the circuit breaker is initially closed. Likewise, a close command can only be issued if the CB is initially open.
Page 338 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-164 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Where the check synchronism function is set, this can be enabled to supervise manual circuit breaker close commands. A circuit breaker close output will only be issued if the check synchronism criteria are satisfied.
Page 339 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-165 Figure 106 Circuit breaker control (P543/P545)
Page 340 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-166 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 4.6.1 CB control using hotkeys (P543/P545) The hotkeys allow direct access to manual trip and close commands without the need to enter the SYSTEM DATA column. Red or green color coding can be applied when used in CB control applications.
Page 341 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-167 The following default logic can be programmed to activate this feature: Figure 108 CB control via function keys default PSL Function key 2 and function key 3 are both enabled and set to ‘Normal’ Mode and the associated DDB signals ‘DDB 1097’...
Page 342 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-168 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 DUAL CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL : P544/P546 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION This section describes the P544/P546 operational control of dual circuit breakers. INTRODUCTION The circuit breaker control and monitoring in the dual-breaker P544/P546 provides single phase or three phase switching of a feeder controlled by two circuit breakers at a line end, for example in a one and a half switch configuration or at a mesh type (ring bus) installation.
Page 343 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-169 Circuit breaker status (P544/P546) For each circuit breaker, the P544/P546 incorporates circuit breaker state monitoring, giving an indication of the position of each circuit breaker or, if the state is unknown, an alarm is raised.
Page 344 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-170 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Auxiliary contact position CB state detected Action Open Closed Breaker Open Circuit breaker healthy Closed Open Breaker Closed Circuit breaker healthy Alarm raised if the condition Closed Closed CB Failure persists for greater than “CB Status time”...
Page 345 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-171 Setting Menu text Default Step size Min. Max. CB1 B Broken 25000 n^ Displays the total fault current interrupted by the relay for the A phase for CB1. CB1 C Broken 25000 n^ 1n^ Displays the total fault current interrupted by the relay for the A phase for CB1.
Page 346 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-172 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Figure 109 CB1 condition monitoring – broken current...
Page 347 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-173 Figure 110 CB2 condition monitoring – broken current...
Page 348 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-174 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Figure 111 CB1 condition monitoring – operation time...
Page 349 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-175 Figure 112 CB2 condition monitoring – operation time...
Page 350 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-176 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Figure 113 Circuit breaker 1 – monitoring...
Page 351 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-177 Figure 114 Circuit breaker 2 – monitoring Circuit breaker control (P544/P546) This functionality shows how a circuit breaker close signal from the auto-reclose logic AutoClose CBx (x = 1 or 2) is applied alongside operator controlled circuit breaker close and trip control See AR Figure 43 and Figure 44 (logic diagram supplement) for CB1 &...
Page 352 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-178 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 In the case of the P544/P546, the two circuit breakers may be selectively controlled both locally and remotely if relay contacts are assigned to allow a separate control trip contact and a separate control close for each circuit breaker i.e.
Page 353 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-179 If an attempt to close the circuit breaker is being made and a protection trip signal is generated, the protection trip command overrides the close command. If the system check synchronism function is set, this can be enabled to supervise manual circuit breaker close commands.
Page 354 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-180 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 5.5.1 Circuit breaker control using hotkeys (P544/P546) The hotkeys allow direct access to the manual trip and close commands without the need to use the SYSTEM DATA column of the menu. Red or green color coding can be applied when used in circuit breaker control applications.
Page 355 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-181 Leader CB Leader AR mode Follower CB Follower AR Mode 1Ph or 3Ph 1/3Ph 1/3Ph or 3Ph 1Ph, 3P or 1/3Ph No follower AR No follower AR 1Ph or 3Ph 1/3Ph 1/3Ph or 3Ph 1Ph, 3P or 1/3Ph...
Page 356 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-182 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 5.6.2.1 Circuit breaker healthy (P544/P546) The majority of circuit breakers are only capable of providing one trip-close-trip cycle. Following this, it is necessary to re-establish sufficient energy in the circuit breaker (spring charged, gas pressure healthy, etc.) before the circuit breaker can be reclosed.
Page 357 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-183 5.6.2.4 Reset lockout (P544/P546) The Reset Lockout input can be used to reset the auto-reclose function following lockout and reset any auto-reclose alarms, provided that the signals which initiated the lockout have been removed.
Page 358 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-184 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 5.6.3 Internal signals (P544/P546) 5.6.3.1 Trip initiate signals (P544/P546) The Trip Inputs A, Trip Inputs B and Trip Inputs C signals are used to initiate single or three phase auto-reclose. For single phase auto-reclose these signals must be mapped in the Note: PSL as shown in the default.
Page 359 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-185 Following this introduction to the logic sequence, is a comprehensive description of the auto- reclose and circuit breaker operation. An auto-reclose cycle can be internally initiated by operation of a protection element, provided the circuit breaker is closed until the instant of protection operation.
Page 360 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-186 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 If the protection operates and circuit breaker trips during the reclaim time the relay either advances to the next shot in the programmed auto-reclose cycle, or, if all programmed reclose attempts have been made, the circuit breaker goes to lockout.
Page 361 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-187 Figure 117 Auto-reclose timing diagram – repeated fault inception...
Page 362 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-188 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Figure 118 Auto-relose timing diagram leader/follower (1ph)
Page 363 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-189 Figure 119 Auto-relose timing diagram leader/follower (3ph) 5.6.6 Auto-reclose : main operating features (P544/P546) 5.6.6.1 Circuit breaker in service (P544/P546) The circuit breaker in service logic is shown in AR Figure 4 (logic diagram supplement). To be available for auto-reclosing, each circuit breaker has to be in service when the auto- reclose is initiated by a protection operation.
Page 364 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-190 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 5.6.6.2 Auto-reclose enable (P544/P546) The auto-reclose enable logic is shown in AR Figure 5 (logic diagram supplement). A master enable/disable signal provides overall control of the auto-reclose function for the circuit breakers.
Page 365 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-191 If the “preferred” leader circuit breaker is not available for auto-reclosing then, provided it is available for auto-reclose, the “non-preferred” circuit breaker becomes the “active” leader. If this is the case there will be no follower circuit breaker. If both circuit breakers are available for auto-reclosing and follower reclosing is enabled, then the “preferred leader”...
Page 366 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-192 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Where L refers to the leader circuit breaker, F refers to the follower circuit breaker, 1P implies single phase, 3P implies three phase, and 1/3P implies single or three phase, so a setting of L1/3P F3P would mean that the leader circuit breaker could perform single or three phase auto-reclose, whilst the follower would perform three phase auto-reclose only.
Page 367 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-193 5.6.6.6.2 Auto-reclose initiation by external protection equipment (P544/P546) The following DDB signals are available for mapping in the PSL from opto inputs or communication inputs to initiate auto-reclosing. DDB (535): CB1 Ext Trip A DDB (536): CB1 Ext Trip B DDB (537): CB1 Ext Trip C DDB (534): CB1 Ext Trip 3Ph...
Page 368 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-194 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 and/or three phase reclosing is permitted for that circuit breaker. Dependent upon the settings and trip performed, each circuit breaker can perform:-  Single phase reclose as Leader (with or without follower); ...
Page 369 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-195 If the menu setting BF if LFail Cls is set to Disabled, the follower circuit breaker will reclose even if the leader circuit breaker fails to reclose (for example, due to the absence of a CB Healthy signal).
Page 370 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-196 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 5.6.6.12 Reclaim time & successful auto-reclose (P544/P546) The reclaim time logic is shown in AR Figure 34 and Figure 35 (logic diagram supplement). The successful auto-reclose logic is shown in AR Figure 36, Figure 37 and Figure 38 (logic diagram supplement).
Page 371 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-197 For either circuit breaker, at the completion of any dead time or follower time, the logic starts an AR CBHealthy timer. If the CB Healthy signal (DDB 436 or 437) becomes high before the set time is complete, the timer stops and, if all other relevant circuit breaker closing conditions are satisfied the scheme issues the CB AutoClose signal.
Page 372 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-198 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 5.6.6.15 System checks for circuit breaker closing (P544/P546) The system checks for circuit breaker closing logic is shown in AR Figure 45, Figure 46, Figure 47, Figure 48, Figure 51 and Figure 52 (logic diagram supplement). For three phase auto-reclosing and control closing of the circuit breakers, system voltage checks are separately selectable for :- ...
Page 373 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-199 Manual reclosing for each circuit breaker is controlled according to the settings in the SYSTEM CHECKS column of the menu. The system check options for each circuit breaker are enabled or disabled in the CBxM SC all setting (x = 1 or 2) in the SYSTEM CHECKS column of the menu.
Page 374 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-200 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546  Circuit breaker failure to close. If the circuit breaker fails to close because, for example, the circuit breaker springs are not charged, the gas pressure is low, or there is no synchronism between the system voltages indicated by the AR CBx Unhealthy and AR CBx No Checksync alarms, auto-reclose will be blocked and forced to lockout.
Page 375 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-201 If Rst CB mon LO By is set to User Interface the a further command appears in the the CB CONTROL column of the menu, CB mon LO reset. This command can be used to reset the lockout.
Page 376 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-202 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 The pre-closing system conditions for a given circuit breaker depend on the system configuration and, for auto-reclosing, on the selected auto-reclose program. For example, on a feeder with delayed auto-reclosing, the circuit breakers at the two line ends are normally arranged to close at different times.
Page 377 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-203 5.7.4 Dual circuit breaker system voltage synchronism checks (P544/P546) Two synchronism check stages are provided for each circuit breaker to compare the line and bus voltages when closing a circuit breaker. Synchronism check logic is enabled or disabled per circuit breaker, by settings Sys Checks CB1 to Enable or Disable, and Sys Checks CB2 to Enable, or Disable.
Page 378 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-204 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Synchronism check functions (P544/P546) 5.8.1 Overview Two stages of system synchronism check supervision are provided for each circuit breaker. When required, they control the manual closing and/or auto-reclosing of the associated circuit breaker.
Page 379 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-205 When the check synchronism criteria is satisfied, a DDB signal “CBx CSy OK” is set (x = 1 or 2, y = 1 or 2). For CB1 CS1 OK DDB (883) to be set, the following conditions are necessary: ...
Page 380 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-206 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546  Live Line and Live Bus 2 signals are both set;  None of the selected CB2 CS1 Volt. Blk conditions (V<, V>, VDiff) are true;  If CB2 CS2 SlipCtrl setting is Enabled, the measured slip frequency between the line VT and Bus1 VTs is less than the CB2 CS2 SlipFreqsetting;...
Page 381 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-207 P544/P546 CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL AND AUTO-RECLOSE FIGURES (AR FIGURES) Fig 1 DDB: CB1 Aux3Ph 52A(420) & DDB: CB1 Aux3Ph 52B(424) & DDB: CB1 Closed 3ph(907) & Setting: & None CB1 Status Input: 52A 3Pole &...
Page 382 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-208 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Fig 2 DDB: CB2 Aux3Ph 52A(428) & DDB: CB2 Aux3Ph 52B(432) & DDB: CB2 Closed 3ph(915) & & Setting: None CB2 Status Input: 52A 3Pole & DDB: CB2 Open 3ph(911) None;...
Page 383 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-209 Fig 3 DDB:CB1 Open Aph(904) Int Sig: CB1Op1P DDB:CB1 Open Bph(905) Fig 19,28,32,36 DDB:CB1 Open Cph(906) Int Sig: CB1OpAny DDB: CB1 Open 3ph(903) Fig 16,37,55,56 Int Sig: CB1Op2/3P Fig 16,21,24,28,36 DDB:CB2 Open Aph(912) Int Sig: CB2Op1P DDB:CB2 Open Bph(913)
Page 384 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-210 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Fig 4 DDB: CB1 AR Lockout(306) Fig 55 CBIST Int Sig: CB1CRLO & Fig 57 Setting: NUM CBs : CB1 Only CB1 Only/ CB2 Only/ BothCB1&CB2 Both CB1 CBIST &...
Page 385 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-211 Fig 6 Setting: Leader by Menu Leader Select by: Leader by Menu/ Leader by Opto Leader by Opto/ & Leader by Control Leader by Control & Setting: Sel LeaderCB1 Select Leader: Sel LeaderCB1/ Sel LeaderCB2...
Page 386 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-212 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Fig 7 DDB: Leader CB1(1530) Fig 8 & Int Sig: CB1 LFRC DDB:CB1 Close Fail ( 303) Fig 43 Fig 8,35,56 & DDB:AR CB1 Unhealthy(307) Fig 39 Fig 16 DDB: ARIP(1542) DDB: Leader CB2(1431) Fig 8...
Page 387 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-213 Fig 8 DDB: AR in Service( 1385) Fig 5 DDB: AR Enable CB1 (1609)* DDB: CB 1 In Service( 1526) Fig 4 & DDB: CB 1 NOAR( 1528) Fig 7,16 DDB: CB 1 AR Lockout( 306) Fig 55 Int Sig: BAR CB1...
Page 388 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-214 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Setting: NUM CBs : CB 1 Only Fig 9 CB 2 Only Both CB1&CB2 & Fig 5 DDB: AR in Service(1385) *Note If not mapped in PSL DDB: AR Enable CB1(1609)* &...
Page 389 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-215 Fig 10 Fig 9 Int Sig: CB1 L SPAROK Int Sig: CB1 F SPAROK Fig 9 Fig 16 DDB: CB1 ARIP( 1544) & Int Sig: TARANY Fig 13 & DDB: Seq Counter =1(847) Fig 18 &...
Page 390 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-216 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Fig 11 Setting: PrFunct1 Trip: Initiate AR PrFunct1 Trip No Action Block AR IntSig:Prot AR Block Fig 55,56 Setting: PrFunct2 Trip: Initiate AR PrFunct2 Trip No Action Block AR IntSig: INIT AR Fig 13,14,16,17 &...
Page 391 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-217 Fig 13 Int Sig: CB2 TARA Fig 15 Fig 15 Int Sig: CB2 TARB Fig 15 Int Sig: CB2 TARC Setting: CB1 Only NUM CBs : CB1 Only/ BothCB1&CB2 Int Sig:TAR2/3 PH CB2 Only/ Both CB1...
Page 392 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-218 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Fig 14 Setting: CB2 Only NUM CBs : CB1 Only/ BothCB1&CB2 CB2 Only/ Both CB1 &CB2 Int Sig:CB2 TAR2/3 PH Fig 11 Int Sig: Init AR Fig 54 & DDB: CB2 Trip OutputA(1601) Int Sig: CB2 TARA DDB: CB2 Ext Trip A(539)
Page 393 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-219 Fig 16 DDB: CB2 Ext Trip A (539) DDB: CB2 Ext Trip B(540) DDB: CB2 Ext Trip C(541) DDB: AR START(1541) DDB: CB2 Ext Trip 3Ph(538) Int Sig: Init AR Fig 11 Fig 15,17,18,22,24,25,27,28,29,37,38 DDB: CB1 Ext TripA(535)
Page 394 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-220 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Fig 17 Fig 11 Int Sig: Init AR DDB: CB2 Ext Trip A(539) DDB: CB2 Ext Trip B(540) DDB: CB2 Ext Trip C (541) DDB: CB2 Ext Trip 3Ph(538) Fig 3 Int Sig: CB2OpAny &...
Page 395 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-221 Fig 18 DDB: CB1 ARINIT(1543) Fig 16 DDB: CB2 ARINIT(1434) Fig 17 DDB: ARIP(1542) Fig 16 & DDB: AR START(1541) Fig 16 & Int Sig: SC Increment & DDB: 1P DTime(1554) Fig 24 &...
Page 396 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-222 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Int Sig: CB1L 3PAR Fig 19 Int Sig: CB2L 3PAR DDB: ARIP(1542) Fig 16 Int Sig: LeaderSPAR Int Sig:RESETL-F Fig 20 Fig 35 Fig 16 Int Sig: CB1L ARIP Int Sig:CB1L SPAROK Fig 9 &...
Page 397 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-223 Fig 20 Fig 13 Int Sig: TMEM ANY & 0.02 & Int Sig:Prot Re-op Fig 13 Int Sig: TAR ANY & Fig 18,32,33,35,55,56 Int Sig:RESETL-F & DDB: 1P DTime(1554) Fig 24 Fig 7,8,19 Discrim T...
Page 398 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-224 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Fig 22 Pr AR Disable Setting: DT Start by Prot: & DDB: DTOK All(1551) Pr AR Disable/Pr Pr ProtOp ProtOp/Pr ProtRes Fig 24,25 Pr ProtRes & DDB: AR START(1541) Fig 16 &...
Page 399 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-227 Fig 24 Fig 19 Int Sig: CB1LSPAR & Fig 22 DDB: DTOK CB1L 1P(1552) & Int Sig: CB2LSPAR Fig 19 & DDB: DTOK CB2L 1P(1542) Fig 22 Fig 18 DDB: Seq Counter=1(847) DDB: DTOK All(1551) Int Sig: OKTimeSP...
Page 400 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-228 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Fig 25 Int Sig: CB1L3PAR & Fig 21 Fig 22 DDB:DTOK CB1L 3P(1553) Int Sig: CB2L3PAR Fig 21 & Fig 22 DDB: DTOK CB2L 3P(1543) DDB: DTOK All(1551) Fig 22 &...
Page 401 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-229 Fig 26 Int Sig: 3PDTCOMP Fig 25,26 DDB: OKTIME3P(1555) Fig 25 3PDTIME1 & Fig 18 DDB: Seq Counter=1(847) DDB: 3P DTime1(1556) & DTIME2 & Fig 18 DDB: Seq Counter=2(848) &...
Page 402 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-230 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Fig 27 Setting: BF if Lfail Cls: Disabled Enabled/Disabled DDB: Control CloseCB 1(839) Fig 43 & Fig 19 Int Sig: CB2FSPAR Int Sig: CB2F3PAR Fig 21 DDB: CB2 Closed 3ph(915) &...
Page 403 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-231 Fig 28 Setting: Dynamic F/L : Enabled Enabled/Disable & Int Sig: CB1 LFRC Int Sig: CB2 LFRC Int Sig: CB1OP1P Fig 3 Int Sig: CB1FSPAR Fig 19 & Fig 27 DDB: En CB1 Follower(1488) &...
Page 404 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-232 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Fig 29 Setting: Dynamic F/L : Enabled Enabled/Disable & Int Sig: CB1 LFRC Int Sig: CB2 LFRC DDB: CB1 Open 3ph(903) Int Sig: CB1F3PAR Fig 21 & DDB: En CB1 Follower(1488) Fig 27 &...
Page 405 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-233 DDB: Any Trip(522) DDB: CB1 AR Lockout(306) Fig 55 Fig 32 & DDB: CB1HEALTHY(436)* IntSig: CB1SPDTCOMP & Fig 24 *Note IntSig: CB1OP1P If not mapped in PSL Fig 3 are defaulted high .
Page 406 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-234 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 DDB: Any Trip(522) Fig 33 DDB: CB2 AR Lockout(328) Fig 56 & DDB: CB2HEALTHY(437)* IntSig: CB2SPDTCOMP & Fig 24 *Note Fig 3 IntSig: CB2OP1P If not mapped in PSL are defaulted high .
Page 407 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-235 Fig 34 Fig 24 IntSig: CB1SPDTCOMP IntSig: CB1SPFTCOMP Fig 28 & Fig 32 DDB: Set CB1 Close(1565) IntSig: SETCB1SPCL Fig 26 IntSig: CB13PDTCOMP Fig 35,36 & DDB: CB1LSCOK(1573) Fig 45 Fig 45 DDB: CB1FASTSCOK(1572) &...
Page 408 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-236 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Fig 35 IntSig: SETCB1SPCL Fig 34 Logic 1 Fig 17 IntSig: CB2FARIP Fig 34 IntSig: SETCB2SPCL SPAR RECLAIM TIME Fig 34 IntSig: SETCB23PCL DDB: 1P Reclaim TComp(1568) DDB: Auto Close CB1(854) &...
Page 409 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-237 Fig 36 Fig 35 DDB: 3P Reclaim TComp(1570) Fig 35 DDB: 1P Reclaim TComp(1568) Fig 34 IntSig: SETCB1SPCL & & Fig 3 IntSig: CB1OP1P DDB: CB1 Succ 1P AR(1571) 0.02S &...
Page 410 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-238 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Fig 37 Fig 3 IntSig: CB1OPANY Fig 16 DDB: AR START(1541) Enabled Setting: Res AROKby UI: Enabled/Disabled Disabled & COMMAND: Reset AROK Ind Setting: Enabled Res AROK by NoAR: Enabled/Disabled Disabled IntSig: RESCB1ARSUCC...
Page 411 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-239 Fig 38 Fig 3 IntSig: CB2OPANY Fig 16 DDB: AR START(1541) Enabled Setting: Res AROKby UI: Enabled/Disabled Disabled & COMMAND: Reset AROK Ind Setting: Enabled Res AROK by NoAR: Enabled/Disabled Disabled IntSig: RESCB2ARSUCC...
Page 412 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-240 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Fig 39 Fig 21 IntSig: CB1L3PAR Fig 25 DDB: OK Time 3P(1555) & *Note If not mapped in PSL DDB: CB1 Fast SCOK(1572) Fig 45 are defaulted high . Fig 24 IntSig: CB1SPDTCOMP Fig 28...
Page 413 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-241 Fig 41 CB 1 TOTAL SHOTS Fig 32 DDB: Set CB1 Close(1565) COUNTER CB 1 SUCCESSFUL Fig 36 DDB: CB1 Succ 1P AR(1571) SPAR SHOT 1 COUNTER Fig 36 DDB: CB1 Succ 3P AR(852) CB 1 SUCCESSFUL &...
Page 414 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-242 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Fig 42 CB 2 TOTAL SHOTS DDB: Set CB2 Close(1449) Fig 33 COUNTER CB 2 SUCCESSFUL DDB: CB2 Succ 1P AR(1451) Fig 36 SPAR SHOT 1 COUNTER DDB: CB2 Succ 3P AR(1452) Fig 36 CB 2 SUCCESSFUL &...
Page 415 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-243 Disable Settings: Local Fig 43 CB Control by Remote *Note Local & Remote If not mapped in PSL Opto are defaulted high . Enable opto Local & Opto initiated Remote &...
Page 416 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-244 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Disable Fig 44 SET: Local CB Control by Remote *Note Local & Remote If not mapped in PSL Opto are defaulted high . Local & Opto Enable opto initiated Remote &...
Page 417 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-245 Fig 45 Setting: CB1L SC ClsNoDly: Enabled Enabled/Disabled DDB: CB1FASTSCOK(1572) & Fig 32,34,39 Setting: Enabled CB1L SC CS1: Enabled/Disabled & DDB:CB1 CS1 OK(883) Setting: CB1L SC CS2 Enabled Enabled/Disabled &...
Page 418 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-246 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Fig 46 Setting: CB2L SC ClsNoDly: Enabled Enabled/Disabled & DDB: CB2FASTSCOK(1454) Fig 33,34,40 Setting: CB2L SC CS1: Enabled Enabled/Disabled & DDB:CB2 CS1 OK(1577) Setting: CB2L SC CS2 Enabled Enabled/Disabled &...
Page 419 Operation P54x/EN OP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (OP) 5-247 Fig 47 Setting: CB1F SC CS1: Enabled Enabled/Disabled & DDB:CB1 CS1 OK(883) Setting: CB1F SC CS2 Enabled Enabled/Disabled & DDB:CB1 CS2 OK(884) Setting: CB1F SC DLLB: Enabled Enabled/Disabled DDB: Dead Line (889) &...
Page 420 P54x/EN OP/La4 Operation (OP) 5-248 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Fig 48 Setting: CB2F SC CS1: Enabled Enabled/Disabled & DDB:CB2 CS1 OK(1577) Setting: CB2F SC CS2 Enabled Enabled/Disabled & DDB:CB2 CS2 OK(1463) Setting: CB2F SC DLLB: Enabled Enabled/Disabled DDB: Dead Line(889) &...
Page 421 Operation P54x/EN OP/B94 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (OP) 5-249 Setting: Fig 51 Enabled CB1M SC CS1: Enabled/Disabled & DDB:CB1 CS1 OK(883) Setting: CB1M SC CS2 Enabled Enabled/Disabled & DDB:CB1 CS2 OK(884) Setting: Enabled CB1M SC DLLB: Enabled/Disabled DDB: Dead Line (889) &...
Page 422 P54x/EN OP/B94 Operation (OP) 5-250 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Setting: Fig 52 Enabled CB2M SC CS1: Enabled/Disabled & DDB:CB2 CS1 OK(1577) Setting: CB2M SC CS2 Enabled Enabled/Disabled & DDB:CB2 CS2 OK(1463) Setting: Enabled CB2M SC DLLB: Enabled/Disabled DDB: Dead Line(889) &...
Page 423 Operation P54x/EN OP/B94 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (OP) 5-251 Fig 53 Trip Pulse Time Fig 13 IntSig: TAR2/3Ph & DDB: CB1 Open 3ph(903) DDB: CB1 Closed 3ph(907) Fig 13 IntSig: TARA Trip Pulse Time & Fig 13 IntSig: TMEM2/3Ph &...
Page 424 P54x/EN OP/B94 Operation (OP) 5-252 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Fig 54 Trip Pulse Time IntSig: CB2 TAR2/3Ph Fig 14 & DDB: CB2 Open 3ph(911) DDB: CB2 Closed 3ph(915) Fig 14 IntSig: CB2 TARA Trip Pulse Time & IntSig: CB2 TMEM2/3Ph Fig 14 &...
Page 425 Operation P54x/EN OP/B94 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (OP) 5-253 Fig 55 Fig 15 IntSig: FLTMEM3P & Setting: BAR3Ph Multi Phase AR: Allow Autoclose/BAR BAR2and3Ph 2and 3 Ph/BAR 3Phase & IntSig: FLTMEM2P Fig 15 Fig 43 DDB: CB1 CloseFail (303) Setting: BF if Lfail Cls : Enabled...
Page 426 P54x/EN OP/B94 Operation (OP) 5-254 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Fig 55a Fig 55 IntSig: BARCB1 Fig 5 DDB: AR In Service(1385) & & DDB: CB1 AR Lockout(306) Setting: NUM CBs : CB1 Only CB1 Only/ 4,8,10,20,27,32,39,41,56, CB2 Only/ Both CB1 &...
Page 427 Operation P54x/EN OP/B94 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (OP) 5-255 Fig 56 Fig 15 IntSig: FLTMEM3P & Setting: BAR3Ph Multi Phase AR: Allow Autoclose /BAR BAR2and3Ph 2and3 Ph/BAR 3Phase & Fig 15 IntSig: FLTMEM2P Fig 44 DDB: CB2CloseFail ( 325) Setting: BF if Lfail Cls: Enabled...
Page 428 P54x/EN OP/B94 Operation (OP) 5-256 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Fig 56a IntSig: BARCB2 Fig 56 DDB: AR In Service(1385) Fig 5 & & DDB: CB2 AR Lockout(328) Setting: NUM CBs : CB2 Only CB1 Only/ 4,8,10,20,27,33,40,42,5 CB2 Only/ Both CB1 5,58 BothCB1&CB2 &CB2...
Page 429 Operation P54x/EN OP/B94 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (OP) 5-257 Fig 58 Setting: Res LO by CB IS: Enabled Enabled/Disabled & Fig 4 IntSig: CB2CRLO Setting: Res LO by UI: Enabled Enabled/Disabled COMMAND: & ResetCB2LO: Yes/No Setting: Res LO by NoAR: Enabled Enabled/Disabled Fig 5...
Page 430 P54x/EN OP/B94 Operation (OP) 5-258 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Fig 59 ConfigurationSetting : Enabled System Checks : Enabled/Disabled Disabled Setting : Line Select ChSyn CSRef Phase Live Line Bus1 CS1 CS Dead Line Live Bus 1 Bus2 CS2 CS Dead Bus1 VOLTAGE MONITORS...
Page 431 Operation P54x/EN OP/B94 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (OP) 5-259 Fig 60 Enabled ConfigurationSetting : System Checks: Disabled DDB:SchkslnactiveCB1(880) Enabled/Disabled Setting: Enabled & System Checks CB1: Disabled Enabled/Disabled CB1 CS1CriteriaOK & CB1 CS2CriteriaOK Setting: & Select CB1 CS1SlipF> DDB: CB1 CS1SlipF>(1578) &...
Page 432 P54x/EN OP/B94 Operation (OP) 5-260 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Figure 61 CB2 synch check signals...
Page 433 Operation P54x/EN OP/B94 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (OP) 5-261 Fig 62 DDB: CB1 AR Lockout(306) DDB: CB1 LO Alarm(860) 0.04s DDB: Pole Discrep.CB1(451) DDB: Pole Discrep.CB1(699) & & DDB: CB1 AR 1p InProg(845) DDB:CB1 Open Aph(904) DDB:CB1 Open Bph(905) DDB:CB1 Open Cph(906) &...
Page 434 P54x/EN OP/B94 Operation (OP) 5-262 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Fig 63 DDB: Trip Inputs A (530) DDB: CB1 Trip Output A(523) DDB: Trip Inputs B (531) DDB: CB1Trip Output B(524) DDB: Trip Inputs C (532) DDB: CB1 Trip Output C(525) Setting: CB1 TripMode 1 /3P...
Page 435 Operation P54x/EN OP/B94 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (OP) 5-263 P544/P546 CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL AND AUTO-RECLOSE LOGIC: INTERNAL SIGNAL DEFIN ITIONS The breaker control functionality of the P544/P546 is described in the figures in the previous section. Within that description a number of signals that are internal to the logic of the circuit breaker control are featured.
Page 436 P54x/EN OP/B94 Operation (OP) 5-264 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Name Description CB1 CS2AngHigh+ Int Sig + DDB: Line/Bus1 phase angle in range: +CB1 CS2 Angle to +180deg CB1 CS2FL<FB Int Sig + DDB: Bus1 F > (Line F + “CB1 CS2 SlipFreqf”) CB1 CS2FL>FB Int Sig + DDB: Line F >...
Page 437 Operation P54x/EN OP/B94 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (OP) 5-265 Name Description CB2 3PDTCOMP Int Sig: CB2 3PAR dead time complete CB2 3PFTCOMP Int Sig: CB2 3PAR follower time complete CB2 3POK Int Sig: CB2 OK for 3P AR (leader or follower) CB2 ARSUCC Int Sig: CB2 auto-reclose sucessful...
Page 438 P54x/EN OP/B94 Operation (OP) 5-266 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Name Description CB2 LARIP Int Sig: CB2 ARIP as leader CB2 Op1P Int Sig: CB2 open single phase CB2 Op2/3P Int Sig: CB2 open on 2 or 3 phases CB2 OpAny Int Sig: CB2 open on 1, 2 or 3 phases CB2 SPOK Int Sig: CB2 OK for SP AR (leader or...
Page 439 Operation P54x/EN OP/B94 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (OP) 5-267 Name Description CS1 Ang Rot ACW Int Sig + DDB: Line freq > (Bus1 freq + 0.001Hz) (CS1 Angle Rotating Anticlockwise) CS1 Ang Rot CW Int Sig + DDB: Bus1 freq > (Line freq + 0.001Hz) (CS1 Angle Rotating Clockwise) CS2 Ang Rot ACW...
Page 440 P54x/EN OP/B94 Operation (OP) 5-268 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 Name Description Live Bus 2 Int Sig + DDB: CS2 V magnitude >= Live Bus 2 setting Live Line Int Sig + DDB: Line V magnitude >= Live Line setting OK Time SP Int Sig from “Single Phase AR Lead CB Dead Time”...
Page 441 Operation P54x/EN OP/B94 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546 (OP) 5-269 Name Description TMEM 1Ph Int Sig: CB1 1Ph trip +AR AR initiation memory TMEM 2/3Ph Int Sig: CB1 2Ph trip +AR AR initiation memory TMEM 3Ph Int Sig: CB1 3Ph trip +AR AR initiation memory TMEM ANY Int Sig: Any Ph trip &...
Page 442 P54x/EN OP/B94 Operation (OP) 5-270 MiCOM P543, P544, P545, P546...
Page 443: P54X/En Ap/La4
Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 APPLICATION NOTES Date: March 2009 Hardware Suffix: Software Version: 45 (P543/4/5/6 without Distance) 55 (P543/4/5/6 with Distance) Connection Diagrams: 10P54302 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54303 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54400 10P54404 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54405 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54502 (SH 1 to 2)
Page 444 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 445 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-1 CONTENTS (AP) 6- INTRODUCTION Protection of overhead line, cable, and hybrid circuits APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS Differential protection 2.1.1 Setting of the phase differential characteristic 2.1.2 Relay sensitivity under heavy load conditions 2.1.3 CT ratio correction (all models) 2.1.4...
Page 446 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-2 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 2.3.17.1 Setting option recommendation (Distance option only) 2.3.17.2 Blinder limits determination (Distance option only) 2.3.17.3 Delta t, R5 and R6 setting determination (Distance option only) 2.3.17.4 Tost (trip delay) setting (Distance option only) 2.3.17.5 Blinder angle setting (Distance option only) 2.3.17.6 Out of step operation on series compensated lines (Distance option only) 2.3.18...
Page 447 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-3 2.10 Undervoltage protection 2.11 Overvoltage protection 2.12 Compensated overvoltage protection 2.13 Residual overvoltage (neutral displacement) protection 2.13.1 Setting guidelines 2.14 Circuit breaker fail protection (CBF) 2.14.1 Breaker fail timer settings 2.14.2 Breaker fail undercurrent settings 2.15...
Page 448 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 VT connections 3.4.1 Open delta (vee connected) VT's 3.4.2 VT single point earthing Trip circuit supervision (TCS) 3.5.1 TCS scheme 1 3.5.1.1 Scheme description 3.5.1.2 Scheme 1 PSL 3.5.2 TCS scheme 2 3.5.2.1...
Page 449 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-5 4.1.3.6 Example minimum dead time calculation 4.1.3.7 Reclaim timer setting Current transformer supervision 4.2.1 Standard CTS 4.2.2 Differential CTS Circuit breaker condition monitoring Setting the  ^ thresholds 4.3.1 4.3.2 Setting the number of operations thresholds...
Page 450 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-6 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 6.7.10 Calculation of total impedance till Zone1 reach point 6.7.11 Calculation of X/R till Zone1 reach point 6.7.12 Calculation of fault current till Zone1 reach point 6.7.13 CT Vk for Current differential protection 6.7.14 CT Vk for distance Zone1 reach point 6.7.15...
Page 451 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-7 INTRODUCTION Protection of overhead line, cable, and hybrid circuits Overhead lines, typically ranging from 10 kV distribution lines to 800 kV transmission lines, are probably the most fault susceptible items of plant in a modern power system. It is therefore essential that the protection associated with them provides secure and reliable operation.
Page 452 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-8 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Distance protection on MiCOM P54x offers advanced load blinding and disturbance detection techniques such as power swing blocking to ensure stability when no tripping is required. Selectable mho and quadrilateral (polygon) characteristics allow versatile deployment as main protection for all effectively-earthed transmission and distribution circuits, whether lines, cables or hybrid (a mix of part cable, part overhead line).
Page 453 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-9 APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS The following sections detail the individual protection functions in addition to where and how they may be applied. Worked examples are provided, to show how the settings are applied to the relay.
Page 454 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-10 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Core formation Conductor size Charging current Voltage (kV) and spacing in mm A/km 400 kV Cable Flat, 145 mm 2000 400 kV Cable Tref., 585 mm 3000 Table 1. Typical cable/line charging currents (UK, 50 Hz) If capacitive charging current is disable, the setting of Is1 must be set above 2.5 times the steady state charging current.
Page 455 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-11 Relay sensitivity when |bias| > Is2: For |bias| > s2, the relay would operate if |diff| > k2 |bias| - (k2 - k1) s2 + s1 |F| > k2 (|L| + 0.5 |F|) - (k2 - k1) s2 + s1 (1 - 0.5 k2) |F| >...
Page 456 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-12 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 2.1.4.1 CT ratio correction In many cases the HV and LV current transformer primary ratings will not exactly match the transformer winding rated currents. The CT correction factor must be set to ensure that the signals to the differential algorithm are correct to guarantee current balance of the differential element under load and through fault conditions.
Page 457 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-13 2.1.4.3 High set differential setting When inrush restrain is enabled, a high set differential protection becomes active. This is provided to ensure rapid clearance for heavy internal faults with saturated CTs. Because high set is not restrained by magnetizing inrush, hence the setting must be set such that it will not operate for the largest inrush currents expected.
Page 458 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-14 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Optional distance protection The MiCOM P54x has, by ordering option, a comprehensive integrated distance protection package. This comprises :-  Phase fault distance protection  Earth/ground fault distance protection ...
Page 459 Generally, the characteristic chosen will match the utility practice. If applied for line protection similarly to LFZP Optimho, LFZR, SHNB Micromho or SHPM Quadramho models in the ALSTOM Grid range, a mho selection is recommended. For cable applications, or to set similarly to the MiCOM P441/442/444 models, a quadrilateral selection is recommended.
Page 460 If applied for long and medium length line protection similarly to LFZP Optimho, LFZR, SHNB Micromho or SHPM Quadramho models in the ALSTOM Grid range, a mho selection is recommended. For cable applications, or to set similarly to the MiCOM P441/442/444 models, a quadrilateral selection is recommended.
Page 461 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-17 Zone 3 may also be programmed with a slight reverse (“rev”) offset, in which case its reach in the reverse direction is set as a percentage of the protected line impedance too. This would typically provide back-up protection for the local busbar, where the offset reach is set to 20% for short lines (<30 km) or 10% for longer lines.
Page 462 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-18 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 2.3.8 Quadrilateral ground resistive reaches and tilting (Distance option only) Note: Because the fault current for a ground fault may be limited by tower footing resistance, high soil resistivity, and weak infeeding; any arcing resistance is often higher than for a corresponding phase fault at the same location.
Page 463 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-19 In the case of high resistance external faults on a short line, particularly under heavy power exporting conditions, zone 1 will remain stable due to dynamic downwards tilting of the top line as explained earlier but the detection of high resistance internal faults especially towards the end of the line needs consideration.
Page 464 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-20 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 2.3.9 Phase fault zone settings (Distance option only) Each zone has two additional settings that are not accessible in the Simple set mode. These settings are:  A tilt angle on the top line of any quadrilateral set for phase faults; ...
Page 465 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-21 2.3.12 Distance setup - filtering, load blinding and polarizing (Distance option only) 2.3.12.1 Digital filtering (Distance option only) In most applications, it is recommended that Standard filtering is used. This will ensure that the relay offers fast, sub-cycle tripping.
Page 466 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-22 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 2.3.13.1 Recommended polarizing settings (Distance option only) Cable applications - In line with LFZP123 or LFZR applications for cable feeders, use only minimum 20% (0.2) memory, which results in minimum mho expansion.
Page 467 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-23 Figure 5 shows the typical application of the Basic scheme. pi a app i ati n ip B ip A N t A ti s an b s t instantan us Figure 5 Basic time stepped distance scheme (Distance option only) 2.3.15...
Page 468 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-24 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 In case the OST is enabled the R5, R5’, Z5 and Z5’ settings will be adequate for very slow swing detection. If, however, the OST protection is disabled, set: R5=R5’=0.85 x Z<...
Page 469 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-25 Curve 1 Area 2 Area 1 Out-of-Step Curve 2 Curve 3 Phase Angle Difference between Two Ends Figure 6 Power transfer in relation to angle difference θ between 2 ends The figure above represents power angle curves, with no AR being performed, as follows: Curve 1 - Pre-fault system operation via parallel lines where transmitted power is Po Curve 2 - Transmitted power significantly reduced during two-phase to ground fault...
Page 470 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-26 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 To resume, if area 1<area 2, the system will stay in synchronism. This swing is usually called a recoverable power swing. If, on contrary, the system passes point G with a further increase in angle difference between sending and receiving ends, the system drifts out of synchronism and becomes unstable.
Page 471 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-27 Setting Option 4 provides 2 stages of Out of Step detection and tripping. If the power system oscillation is very fast, the combination of ∆R and Delta t setting (as discussed below) must be set in such a way that ‘Predictive OST’...
Page 472 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-28 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 LOAD    P1976ENa Figure 8 determination (Distance option only) β = 32 + 90 – α Z load min = OA R6MAX < Zload min x cos β Where: ...
Page 473 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-29 Setting of reactance lines Z5 and Z6 will depend on how far from the relay location the power oscillations are to be detected. Normally, there is only one point where the system is to be initially split and that point will be determined by system studies.
Page 474 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-30 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 2.3.17.4 Tost (trip delay) setting (Distance option only) Tost must be set zero for setting Option 2 and 4 above. For setting Option 3, Tost should normally be set to zero. It is only the case if a user wants to operate breaker at the angle closer to 360 degrees (when voltages are in phase) when time delay could be applied.
Page 475 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-31 ∆R MOV’s operation Figure 9 Example of timer reset due to MOV’s operation Note: If ‘OST’ setting is chosen, the timer when triggered, will eventually expire as the power oscillations progress, therefore MOV operation will not have any impact on Out of Step operation.
Page 476 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-32 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 2.3.20 Trip on reclose mode (Distance option only) To ensure fast isolation of all persistent faults following the circuit breaker reclosure. It is recommended this feature is enabled with appropriate zones selected and/or ‘Current No Volt’...
Page 477 Delta I Rev Delta I Fwd x 0.66 This setting philosophy is in-accordance with the well-proven ALSTOM Grid LFDC relay. Deltas by their nature are present only for 2 cycles on fault inception. If any distance elements are enabled, these will automatically allow the delta forward or reverse decisions to “seal-in”, until such time as the fault is cleared from the system.
Page 478 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-34 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Channel aided schemes (Distance option only) The MiCOM P54x offers two sets of aided channel (“pilot”) schemes, which may be operated in parallel. Aided Scheme 1 May be keyed by distance and/or DEF and/ or delta directional comparison Aided Scheme 2 May be keyed by distance and/or DEF and/ or delta directional...
Page 479 + 20 ms. 2.4.8 Aided DEF ground fault scheme - permissive overreach (Distance option only) This POR scheme is similar to that used in all other ALSTOM Grid relays. Send logic: IN> Forward pickup Permissive trip logic: IN> Forward plus Channel Received...
Page 480 Setting examples for phase fault overcurrent protection can be found in the Network Protection and Automation Guide (NPAG), a comprehensive reference textbook available from ALSTOM Grid. Caution: The IEEE C.37.112 standard for IDMT curves permits some freedom to manufacturers at which time dial (TD) value the reference curve applies.
Page 481 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-37 2.6.1 Directional overcurrent characteristic angle settings The relay uses a 90° connection angle for the directional overcurrent elements. The relay characteristic angles in this case are nominally set to: ...
Page 482 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-38 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Earth fault (ground overcurrent) and sensitive earth fault (SEF) protection Caution: The IEEE C.37.112 standard for IDMT curves permits some freedom to manufacturers at which time dial (TD) value the reference curve applies.
Page 483 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-39 le l d le o le l d he h e r h co ec o correc o o er o orrec er o P0112ENa Figure 10 Positioning of core balance current transformers As can be seen from the diagram, if the cable sheath is terminated at the cable gland and earthed directly at that point, a cable fault (from phase to sheath) will not result in any unbalance current in the core balance CT.
Page 484 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-40 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 2.9.1 Negative phase sequence current threshold, '2> current set' The current pick-up threshold must be set higher than the negative phase sequence current due to the maximum normal load unbalance on the system. This can be set practically at the commissioning stage, making use of the relay measurement function to display the standing negative phase sequence current, and setting at least 20% above this figure.
Page 485 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-41 2.11 Overvoltage protection The inclusion of the two stages and their respective operating characteristics allows for a number of possible applications;  Use of the IDMT characteristic gives the option of a longer time delay if the overvoltage condition is only slight but results in a fast trip for a severe overvoltage.
Page 486 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-42 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 2.13 Residual overvoltage (neutral displacement) protection On a healthy three phase power system, the addition of each of the three phase to earth voltages is nominally zero, as it is the vector addition of three balanced vectors at 120° to one another.
Page 487 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-43 P0118ENa Figure 13 Residual voltage, resistance earthed system Figure 13 shows that a resistance earthed system will always generate a relatively large degree of residual voltage, as the zero sequence source impedance now includes the earthing impedance.
Page 488 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-44 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 2.13.1 Setting guidelines The voltage setting applied to the elements is dependent upon the magnitude of residual voltage that is expected to occur during the earth fault condition. This in turn is dependent upon the method of system earthing employed and may be calculated by using the formulae previously given in Figure 12 and Figure 13.
Page 489 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-45 2.15 Broken conductor detection The majority of faults on a power system occur between one phase and ground or two phases and ground. These are known as shunt faults and arise from lightning discharges and other overvoltages which initiate flashovers.
Page 490 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-46 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 2.16 Communication between relays 2.16.1 Optical budgets When applying any of the P54x range of current differential relays it is important to select the appropriate protection communications interface. This will depend on the fiber used and distance between devices.
Page 491 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-47 2.16.2 Clock source setting The Clock Source should be set to “Internal” at all system ends, where they are connected by direct optical fiber, as the P54x at each end has to supply the clock. The Clock Source should be set to External at all system ends, where the ends are connected by multiplexer equipment which is receiving a master clock signal from the multiplexer network.
Page 492 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-48 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Channel Typical delay Maximum mode Application Comments (ms) (ms) setting Assuming no Direct Fiber 3 to 7 repeaters (no source of digital “noise”) Permissive For channel bit error Multiplexed Link 5 to 8 + MUX 12 + MUX...
Page 493 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-49 WORKED PROTECTION EXAMPLE AND OTHER PROTECTION TIPS Differential protection setting examples 3.1.1 Differential element All four settings are user adjustable. This flexibility in settings allows the relay characteristic to be tailored to suit particular sensitivity and CT requirements.
Page 494 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-50 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 If VT is connected, a facility exists to overcome the effects of the line charging current. It will be necessary in this case to enter the line positive sequence susceptance value. This can be calculated from the line charging current as follows (assuming a VT ratio of 33 kV / 110 V): ch = 25 x 2.5 A = 62.5 A...
Page 495 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-51 When a Star/Delta software interposing CT is chosen, no additional account has to be taken for the 3 factor which would be introduced by the delta winding. This is accounted for by the relay.
Page 496 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-52 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Considering the charging current on the circuit shown in Figure 16, the following calculation is done:  Ich = 0.58 A ( 45 + 30 + 10 ) = 49.3 A ...
Page 497 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-53 Susceptance settings: For Ends A and B With a VT ratio 275 kV/110 V and CT ratio 4000/5 RCT = 800 RVT = 2500 = 310 S Secondary susceptance = 310 S x RVT/ RCT = 968 S For End C With a VT ratio 275 kV/110 V and CT ratio 1200/5 B = 310 S...
Page 498 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-54 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 It is necessary to calculate the required ratio correction factor (CF) as well as the phase correction factor for each end. To choose the appropriate vector compensation, it is necessary to account for phase current and zero sequence current filtering as explained in example 3.1.2.
Page 499 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-55 Therefore, settings in secondary values are: For relays rated to 1 A (HV and MV sides) Is1 = 200 mA and Is2 = 2 A For relay rated to 5 A (LV side) Is1 = 1 A and Is2 = 10 A For the current differential high setting (Id High set) the setting must be in excess of the anticipated inrush current after ratio correction.
Page 500 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-56 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 3.2.2 System data Line length: 100 km = 0.089 + j0.476 = 0.484 79.4 /km Line impedances: Z = 0.426 + j1.576 = 1.632 74.8 /km = 3.372 -4.6 CT ratio: 1 200/5 VT ratio:...
Page 501 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-57 3.2.6 Zone 1 phase and ground reach settings Required Zone 1 reach is to be 80% of the line impedance between Green Valley and Blue River substations. Setting the Relay in the SIMPLE setting mode (recommended): ...
Page 502 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-58 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Remote Zone 2 reach (Blue River-Green Valley) line impedance + 50%n (Green Valley-Tiger Bay) line impedance (100+40) x 0.484 79.4 x 0.12 8.13 79.4  secondary Z4  ((8.13 79.4) x 120%) - (5.81 79.4) = 3.95 79.4...
Page 503 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-59 Note: Dual-end infeed effects will make a fault resistance appear higher, because each relay cannot measure the current contribution from the remote line end. The apparent fault resistance increase factor could be 2 to 8 times the calculated resistance.
Page 504 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-60 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 m ed ce ee y rel y Figure 19 Teed feeder application - apparent impedances seen by RELAY 3.3.2 Permissive overreach schemes To ensure operation for internal faults in a POR scheme, the relays at the three terminals should be able to see a fault at any point within the protected feeder.
Page 505 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-61 here o o e o erl l ee Rel y ee re er e Figure 20 Teed feeder applications Figure 20 (iii) illustrates a further difficulty for a PUR scheme. In this example current is outfed from terminal 'C' for an internal fault.
Page 506 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-62 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 VT connections 3.4.1 Open delta (vee connected) VT's The MiCOM P54x relay can be used with vee connected VTs by connecting the VT secondary’s to: C19, C20 and C21 input terminals, with the C22 input left unconnected for P543 and P544 D19, D20 and D21 input terminals, with the D22 input left unconnected for P545 and P546 This type of VT arrangement cannot pass zero-sequence (residual) voltage to the relay, or provide any phase to neutral voltage quantities.
Page 507 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-63 3.5.1 TCS scheme 1 3.5.1.1 Scheme description Figure 21 TCS scheme 1 This scheme provides supervision of the trip coil with the breaker open or closed, however, pre-closing supervision is not provided. This scheme is also incompatible with latched trip contacts, as a latched contact will short out the opto for greater than the recommended DDO timer setting of 400 ms.
Page 508 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-64 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Opto Input NC Output Relay Drop-Off Straight Latching & Pick-up User Alarm P2229ENa Figure 22 PSL for TCS schemes 1 and 3 3.5.2 TCS scheme 2 3.5.2.1 Scheme description Figure 23 TCS scheme 2 Much like scheme 1, this scheme provides supervision of the trip coil with the breaker open...
Page 509 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-65 3.5.2.2 Scheme 2 PSL The PSL for this scheme (Figure 23) is practically the same as that of scheme 1. The main difference being that both opto inputs must be off before a trip circuit fail alarm is given. Opto Input Drop-Off NC Output Relay...
Page 510 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-66 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Note: Scheme 3 is not compatible with auxiliary supply voltages of 30/34 volts and below. 3.5.3.2 Scheme 3 PSL The PSL for scheme 3 is identical to that of scheme 1 (see Figure 21). Intermicom application example The protection signaling channels of the P54x primarily intended to provide the capability for...
Page 511 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-67 Figure 26 InterMiCOM mapping in a three ended application...
Page 512 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-68 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 3.6.2 Intermicom application example general advice MiCOM relays have standard, pre-configured aided scheme logic internal to each relay. Therefore, it is not necessary to draw the zone logic for Permissive Underreach, Permissive Overreach or Blocking schemes within the PSL.
Page 513 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-69 3.6.4 Intermicom application example scheme description The scheme in Figure 26 is assumed as a case study. The top half of the page shows the mapping of the send and receive logic as already described. It can be seen that the first InterMiCOM bit (Input 1) is being used for the purposes of Aided scheme 1.
Page 514 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-70 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 3.6.6 Intermicom application example transfer trip The case study scheme shows a suggested Transfer Trip (“Intertrip”) in the lower dotted box area. This is an optional addition (or alternative) with any aided scheme. The example shows an opto input (L5) which is being used to initiate the intertrip, mapped to send IM64 bit 5 to both remote ends.
Page 515 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-71 3.6.9.3 InterMiCOM application example - distance blocking  Dist dly (50Hz) 25 ms + MUX  Dist dly (60Hz) 22 ms + MUX  tREV. Guard 25 ms + MUX 3.6.9.4 InterMiCOM application example - directional earth Fault (DEF) POR permissive overreach...
Page 516 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-72 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 APPLICATION OF NON PROTECTION FUNCTIONS Single and three phase auto-reclosing 4.1.1 Time delayed and high speed auto-reclosing An analysis of faults on any overhead line network has shown that 80-90% are transient in nature.
Page 517 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-73 4.1.3.3 Dead timer setting High speed auto-reclose may be required to maintain stability on a network with two or more power sources. For high speed auto-reclose the system disturbance time should be minimized by using fast protection, <30 ms, such as distance or feeder differential protection and fast circuit breakers <60 ms.
Page 518 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-74 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 4.1.3.5 De-ionizing time The de-ionization time of a fault arc depends on circuit voltage, conductor spacing, fault current and duration, wind speed and capacitive coupling from adjacent conductors. As circuit voltage is generally the most significant, minimum de-ionizing times can be specified as in Table 30 below.
Page 519 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-75  Switchgear Maintenance - Excessive operation resulting from short reclaim times can mean shorter maintenance intervals  The Reclaim Time setting is generally set greater than the tZ2 distance zone delay Current transformer supervision MiCOM P54x has two methods of detecting CT problems: Differential CTS and Standard CTS as detailed in the Operation Section.
Page 520 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-76 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Circuit breaker condition monitoring Setting the  ^ thresholds 4.3.1 Where overhead lines are prone to frequent faults and are protected by oil circuit breakers (OCB’s), oil changes account for a large proportion of the life cycle cost of the switchgear. Generally, oil changes are performed at a fixed interval of circuit breaker fault operations.
Page 521 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-77 TWO CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTOL (P446) WORKED EXAMPLE A worked example of the control of a feeder switched by a dual circuit breaker is presented below. Detailed explanation of the control of such a scheme is presented in the operations chapter (P54x/EN/OP) of this manual.
Page 522 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-78 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 For a single phase fault, CB1 will trip single phase and CB2 will trip three phase. When the fault has been cleared, CB1 will reclose single phase without any system voltage checks after the selected Single Phase AR dead time, then, after the follower time delay, CB2 will reclose three phase, subject to a synchronism check between the line and Bus 2.
Page 523 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-79 5.4.2 CONFIGURATION menu: In the CONFIGURATION column, the following should all be set to Enabled :-  Distance (09 0B)  System Checks (09 23)  Auto-Reclose (09 24) 5.4.3 CT &...
Page 524 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-80 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 5.4.7 GROUP 1 SYSTEM CHECKS menu: In the GROUP 1 SYSTEM CHECKS column, the following should be set :-  Live Line (48 85): set 32 V (typical setting 50% of nominal applied voltage of selected CS Input (set to A-N in this example));...
Page 525 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-81 5.4.8 GROUP 1 AUTORECLOSE menu: In the GROUP 1 AUTORECLOSE column, the following should be set :-  Num CBs (49 50): set Both CB1&CB2;  Lead/Foll ARMode (49 53): set L 1/3P, F 3P; ...
Page 526 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-82 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546  CB1L SC DLLB (49 AB): set Enabled;  CB1L SC LLDB (49 AC): set Disabled;  CB1L SC DLDB (49 AD): set Disabled;  CB2F SC all (49 BD): set Enabled; ...
Page 527 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-83 CURRENT TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS Recommended CT classes (British and IEC) Class X current transformers with a knee point voltage greater or equal than that calculated can be used. Class 5P protection CTs can be used, noting that the knee point voltage equivalent these offer can be approximated from: (VA x ALF)/In + (RCT x ALF x In) Where:...
Page 528 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-84 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546  This is valid for (If x X/R)  600 For higher (If x X/R) up to 1600: Zone 1 reach point accuracy (RPA)  x IF Z1 x (1+ X/R). (RCT + RL) Where: Required CT knee point voltage (volts) Fixed dimensioning factor = always 0.6...
Page 529 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-85 Worked example for CT requirements The Power system and the line parameters (Line length: 100 km) as given in section 3.2 is used here to calculate CT requirements. 6.7.1 Important notes to be considered ...
Page 530 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-86 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 6.7.5 Calculation of full line impedance (full 100 kms) = 0.089 + j 0.476 ohm / km = 8.9 + j 47.6 ohms = 48.42 ohms with an angle 79.4 deg 6.7.6 Calculation of total impedance till remote bus bar ZT = Zs + ZL...
Page 531 Application Notes P54x/EN AP/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (AP) 6-87 6.7.13 CT Vk for Current differential protection If thro * X/R thro = 2.14 * 5.66 = 12.11 The appropriate equation for K and Vk to be is used from section 6.2 >...
Page 532 P54x/EN AP/La4 Application Notes (AP) 6-88 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 HIGH BREAK OUTPUT CONTACTS The high break contacts allow the elimination of auxiliary relays. This in turn helps in the provision of cost effective solutions, minimizing space, wiring, commissioning time, etc.. According to the model selected, in addition to standard output relay boards, one or two ‘high break’...
Page 533: P54X/En Pl/La4
Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC Date: March 2009 Hardware Suffix: Software Version: 45 (P543/4/5/6 without Distance) 55 (P543/4/5/6 with Distance) Connection Diagrams: 10P54302 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54303 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54400 10P54404 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54405 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54502 (SH 1 to 2)
Page 534 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 535 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-1 CONTENTS (PL) 7- PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC Overview MiCOM S1 Studio Px40 PSL editor How to use MiCOM Px40 PSL editor Warnings Toolbar and commands 1.5.1 Standard tools 1.5.2 Alignment tools 1.5.3 Drawing tools 1.5.4...
Page 536 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-2 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 1.12 Programmable LED output mappings 1.13 Fault recorder start mappings 1.14 PSL DATA column MICOM P543 WITH DISTANCE PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC Output Input Mappings Output Contacts Output Contacts LEDs MICOM P543 WITHOUT DISTANCE PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC Output Input Mappings...
Page 537 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-3 Output Contacts Output Contacts Output Contacts LEDs MICOM P546 WITHOUT DISTANCE PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC Output Input Mappings Output Contacts Output Contacts Output Contacts Output Contacts LEDs...
Page 538 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 539 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-5 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC Overview The purpose of the programmable scheme logic (PSL) is to allow the relay user to configure an individual protection scheme to suit their own particular application. This is achieved through the use of programmable logic gates and delay timers.
Page 540 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-6 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 How to use MiCOM Px40 PSL editor With the MiCOM Px40 PSL Module you can:  Start a new PSL diagram  Extract a PSL file from a MiCOM Px40 IED ...
Page 541 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-7 Toolbar and commands There are a number of toolbars available for easy navigation and editing of PSL. 1.5.1 Standard tools  For file management and printing. 1.5.2 Alignment tools ...
Page 542 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-8 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Opto Signal Create an opto signal. Input Signal Create an input signal. Output Signal Create an output signal. GOOSE In Create an input signal to logic to receive a GOOSE message transmitted from another IED.
Page 543 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-9 Create an AND Gate. OR Gate Create an OR Gate. Programmable Gate Create a programmable gate. PSL logic signals properties The logic signal toolbar is used for the selection of logic signals. Performing a right-mouse click on any logic signal will open a context sensitive menu and one of the options for certain logic elements is the Properties command.
Page 544 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-10 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 1.6.2 Opto signal properties Opto Signal Each opto input can be selected and used for programming in PSL. Activation of the opto input will drive an associated DDB signal. For example activating opto input L1 will assert DDB 032 in the PSL.
Page 545 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-11 1.6.6 GOOSE output signal properties GOOSE Out The Programmable Scheme Logic interfaces with the GOOSE Scheme Logic by means of 32 Virtual outputs. It is possible to map virtual outputs to bit-pairs for transmitting to any subscribed devices (see S1 Users manual for more details).
Page 546 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-12 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 1.6.9 Function key properties Function Key Each function key can be selected and used for programming in PSL. Activation of the function key will drive an associated DDB signal and the DDB signal will remain active depending on the programmed setting i.e.
Page 547 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-13 1.6.13 LED conditioner properties LED Conditioner 1. Select the LED name from the list (only shown when inserting a new symbol). 2. Configure the LED output to be Red, Yellow or Green. Configure a Green LED by driving the Green DDB input.
Page 548 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-14 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 1.6.15 Timer properties Each timer can be selected for pick up, drop off, dwell, pulse or pick-up/drop-off operation. 1. Choose the operation mode from the Timer Mode tick list. 2.
Page 549 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-15 1. Select the Gate type AND, OR, or Programmable. 2. Set the number of inputs to trigger when Programmable is selected. 3. Select if the output of the gate should be inverted using the Invert Output check box. An inverted output is indicated with a "bubble"...
Page 550 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-16 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Description of logic nodes Note: Where applicable. Not all nodes appear in every product variant. DDB no. English text Source Description Output R1 Output Conditioner Assignment of signal to drive output Relay 1 Output R32 Output Conditioner Assignment of signal to drive output Relay 32...
Page 551 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-17 DDB no. English text Source Description VTS indication alarm- failed VT (fuse blow) VT Fail Alarm VT Supervision detected by VT supervision CTS indication alarm (CT supervision alarm) In the cases of two CTs: If standard CTS is used, this indication is CT Fail Alarm...
Page 552 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-18 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 DDB no. English text Source Description If successive calculated propagation delay Comm Delay Alarm C Diff times exceed time delay setting “Comm Delay Tol”, this alarms is ON It indicates that differential protection C Diff Failure C Diff...
Page 553 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-19 DDB no. English text Source Description Auto-reclose circuit breaker unhealthy signal, output from auto-reclose logic. Indicates during auto-reclose in progress, if the circuit AR CB2 Unhealthy CB2 Auto-reclose breaker has to become healthy within the circuit breaker healthy time window P544 and P546 only...
Page 554 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-20 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 DDB no. English text Source Description This is an alarm that is ON if any setting fail during the setting changing process. If this Backup setting Self Monitoring happens, the relay will use the last known good setting 370 to 383...
Page 555 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-21 DDB no. English text Source Description Block phase overvoltage stage 1 time delayed V>1 Timer Block trip Block phase overvoltage stage 2 time delayed V>2 Timer Block trip Block residual overvoltage stage 1 time VN>1 Timer Block delayed trip...
Page 556 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-22 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 DDB no. English text Source Description Initiate closing of circuit breaker 2 from a manual command Init Close CB2 P544 and P546 only Reset Close Dly Reset manual circuit breaker close time delay Reset latched relays &...
Page 557 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-23 DDB no. English text Source Description Inhibit I>1 Inhibit stage 1 overcurrent protection Inhibit I>2 Inhibit stage 2 overcurrent protection Inhibit I>3 Inhibit stage 3 overcurrent protection Inhibit I>4 Inhibit stage 4 overcurrent protection Inhibit IN>1 Inhibit stage 1 earth fault protection...
Page 558 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-24 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 DDB no. English text Source Description Aided channel 1 send - internal send signal Aided 1 Send Aided Scheme Logic generated in signal send logic When using a custom programmable aided scheme 1, the user is able to include a current Aid1 Custom T In reversal guard timer.
Page 559 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-25 DDB no. English text Source Description Aided scheme 2 DEF trip command (output Aid 2 DEF Trip Aided Scheme Logic from aided tripping logic) Any trip signal - can be used as the trip Any Trip Trip Conversion Logic command in three-pole tripping applications...
Page 560 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-26 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 DDB no. English text Source Description External trip A phase - allows external protection to initiate breaker 2 fail CB2 Ext Trip A P544 and P546 only External trip B phase - allows external protection to initiate breaker 2 fail CB2 Ext Trip B P544 and P546 only...
Page 561 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-27 DDB no. English text Source Description I2>3 Start Neg Sequence overcurrent 3rd stage Neg Sequence overcurrent start I2>4 Start Neg Sequence overcurrent 4th stage Neg Sequence overcurrent start I2>1 Trip Neg Sequence overcurrent 1st stage Neg Sequence overcurrent trip...
Page 562 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-28 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 DDB no. English text Source Description Zone 1 B Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone 1 B phase trip Zone 1 C Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone 1 C phase trip Zone 1 N Trip Distance Basic Scheme Zone 1 N trip...
Page 563 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-29 DDB no. English text Source Description Aided channel scheme 2 - weak infeed logic Aid2 WI Trip 3Ph Aided Scheme Logic trip 3 phase Not used Loss of Load Trip Loss of Load Logic Loss of load trip I>1 Trip...
Page 564 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-30 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 DDB no. English text Source Description V>1 Trip B/BC Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 1 B/BC phase trip V>1 Trip C/CA Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 1 C/CA phase trip V>2 Trip Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 2, three phase trip V>2 Trip A/AB...
Page 565 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-31 DDB no. English text Source Description Zone 4 B Start Distance Basic Scheme Zone 4 B phase start Zone 4 C Start Distance Basic Scheme Zone 4 C phase start Zone 4 N Start Distance Basic Scheme Zone 4 N start...
Page 566 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-32 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 DDB no. English text Source Description V>1 Start C/CA Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 1, C phase start V>2 Start Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 2, three phase start V>2 Start A/AB Overvoltage Overvoltage stage 2, A phase start V>2 Start B/BC...
Page 567 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-33 DDB no. English text Source Description Auto-reclose 3 pole in progress (dead time is AR 3pole in prog (CB1) Auto-Reclose running) Single pole auto-reclose in progress (dead AR 1pole in prog (CB1) Auto-Reclose time is running) Auto-reclose sequence counter is at zero - no...
Page 568 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-34 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 DDB no. English text Source Description A phase undercurrent level detector pickup (detects low current). It is used for breaker IA< Start Undercurrent failure in models with one CT input and also it is used for fault record reset (as the sum CTs in models with two CTs) B phase undercurrent level detector pickup...
Page 569 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-35 DDB no. English text Source Description CS2 Enabled (CB1) Check sync. stage 2 enabled Check Sync 1 OK (CB1) Check Sync Check sync. stage 1 OK Check Sync 2 OK (CB1) Check Sync Check sync.
Page 570 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-36 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 DDB no. English text Source Description Circuit breaker 2 A phase is closed CB2 Closed A ph CB Status P544 and P546 only Circuit breaker 2 B phase is closed CB2 Closed B ph CB Status P544 and P546 only...
Page 571 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-37 DDB no. English text Source Description i2/i1 ratio in remote 1 end CT1 exceed CTS CT1 R1 i2/i1>> CT Supervision i2/i1>> setting i2/i1 ratio in remote 1 end CT2 exceed CTS CT2 R1 i2/i1>>...
Page 572 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-38 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 DDB no. English text Source Description ZoneP CN Element Distance Elements Zone P CN ground fault element ZoneP AB Element Distance Elements Zone P AB phase fault element ZoneP BC Element Distance Elements Zone P BC phase fault element...
Page 573 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-39 DDB no. English text Source Description This is an indication of the command “Clear Statistics” available in the PSL. This DDB 1020 Clear Stats Cmd could be used to reset statistics at the remote end (via IM64) by linking it to DDB 544 - clear statistics - at the remote end 1021 to 1023...
Page 574 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-40 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 DDB no. English text Source Description Excessive circuit breaker operating time maintenance alarm - excessive operation time 1110 CB Op Time Maint (CB1) CB Monitoring alarm for the circuit breaker (slow interruption time) Excessive circuit breaker operating time CB Op Time Lockout...
Page 575 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-41 DDB no. English text Source Description Reception of messages on channel 2 has 1130 SignalFail Ch2Rx C Diff stopped Transmission of messages on channel 1 has 1131 SignalFail Ch2Tx C Diff stopped It indicates that GPS sampling synchronization...
Page 576 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-42 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 DDB no. English text Source Description It indicates that level access 1 for HMI 1176 HMI Access Lvl 1 interface is enabled It indicates that level access 2 for HMI 1177 HMI Access Lvl 2 interface is enabled...
Page 577 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-43 DDB no. English text Source Description This applies only if distance primary FUN is selected (in IEC870-5-103) 1377 O/C Trip By VTS This signal is ON if DDB 1376 is ON and one of the overcurrent stages set to be enabled on VTS condition trips This applies only if distance primary FUN is...
Page 578 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-44 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 DDB no. English text Source Description If setting "Foll AR Mode" = Opto, then if input DDB "FAR3P" is high, the follower CB is enabled for three phase autoreclose, if 1410 Follower AR 3P Auto-reclose...
Page 579 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-45 DDB no. English text Source Description DDB mapped in PSL from opto input or logic DDBs (enable CS2-2 check synchronism 1427 CB2 CS2 Enabled function) P544 and P546 only Signal from CB In Service logic, indicating that CB2 is "In Service", i.e.
Page 580 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-46 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 DDB no. English text Source Description Indicates a three pole autoreclose follower time is running (either CB) 1447 3P Follower Time P544 and P546 only Signal from autoreclose logic to initiate CB2 close via “CB2 CB Control”...
Page 581 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-47 DDB no. English text Source Description Line-Bus 1 slip freq > SlipFr 1-2 setting (frequency difference (slip) between line voltage and bus 1 voltage is greater than 1464 CB1 CS2 SlipF>...
Page 582 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-48 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 DDB no. English text Source Description Frequency difference between Line V and Bus2 V is greater than setting "SlipFr2-1" (line 1476 CB2 CS1 FL<FB freq < Bus freq) P544 and P546 only Frequency difference between Line V and Bus2 V is greater than setting "SlipFr2-2"...
Page 583 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-49 DDB no. English text Source Description Line/Bus1 phase angle in range: +Angle 1-2 to +180deg (anticlockwise from Vbus) 1495 CB1 CS2 AngHigh+ P544 and P546 only Line/Bus1 phase angle in range: -Angle 1-2 to -180deg (clockwise from Vbus) 1496 CB1 CS2 AngHigh-...
Page 584 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-50 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 DDB no. English text Source Description DDB mapped in PSL from opto or comms input. This input DDB is used when required to reset any CB1 "Successful Autoreclose" 1517 Ext Rst CB1 AROK signal.
Page 585 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-51 DDB no. English text Source Description CB1 AR cycle in progress 1544 CB1 ARIP Autoreclose P544 and P546 only 1545 Not used Sequence counts greater than shots 1546 SC Count>Shots P544 and P546 only Convert SPAR to 3PAR.
Page 586 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-52 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 DDB no. English text Source Description Single Ph AR reclaim time running 1567 1P Reclaim Time P544 and P546 only Single Ph AR reclaim time complete 1568 1P Reclaim TComp P544 and P546 only Three Ph AR reclaim time running 1569...
Page 587 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-53 DDB no. English text Source Description Bus1 V > (Line V + [VDiff1-2]) 1589 CB1 CS2 VL<VB P544 and P546 only Line F > (Bus1 F + [SlipFr1-1]) 1590 CB1 CS1 FL>FB P544 and P546 only...
Page 588 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-54 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 DDB no. English text Source Description External input via DDB mapped in PSL to enable CB1, if "in service", to be initiated for autoreclosing by an AR initiation signal from protection.
Page 589 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-55 Opto-input P543 relay text Function number Input L8 L8 Ext Trip C Input L9 L9 CB AuxA 52-B Input L10 L10 CB AuxB 52-B Input L11 L11 CB AuxC 52-B Input L12 L12 MCB/VTS Input L13...
Page 590 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-56 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Opto-input P545 relay text Function number Input L9 L9 CB AuxA 52-B Input L10 L10 CB AuxB 52-B Input L11 L11 CB AuxC 52-B Input L12 L12 MCB/VTS Input L13 L13 CB Close Man Input L14...
Page 591 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-57 Opto-input P546 relay text Function number Input L13 L13 CB1 CloseMan Input L14 L14 CB2 CloseMan Input L15 L15 CB1 Healthy Input L16 L16 Stub Bus En Input L17 L17 CB2 Healthy Input L18 L18 IM64...
Page 592 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-58 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Relay P544 relay contact P544 relay text Function conditioner number Output R1 Straight-through R1 Trip Diff/Z1 Output R2 Straight-through R2 SignalingFail Output R3 Dwell 100 ms R3 Any Trip Output R4 Dwell 500 ms R4 General Alarm...
Page 593 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-59 Relay P545 relay contact P545 relay text Function conditioner number Output R21 Straight-through R21 Dist Dly Trp Output R22 Straight-through R22 Aid DEF Trip Output R23 Straight-through R23 Any Start Output R24 Straight-through R24 Aid 1 Send...
Page 594 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-60 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Relay P546 relay contact P546 relay text Function conditioner number Output R23 Straight-through R23 Any Start Output R24 Straight-through R24 Aid 1 Send Output R25 Straight-through R25 GPS Fail Output R26 Straight-through R26 Diff Trip...
Page 595 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-61 Relay P544 relay contact P544 relay text Function conditioner number Output R1 Straight-through R1 Trip Diff/Z1 Output R2 Straight-through R2 SignalingFail Output R3 Dwell 100 ms R3 Any Trip Output R4 Dwell 500 ms R4 General Alarm...
Page 596 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-62 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 P546 with 16 standard outputs and 8 high break outputs (option S) Relay P546 relay contact P546 relay text Function conditioner number Output R1 Straight-through R1 Trip Z1 Output R2 Straight-through R2 SignalingFail...
Page 597 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-63 Relay P546 relay contact P546 relay text Function conditioner number Output R9 Dwell 100 ms R9 CB1 Trip A Output R10 Dwell 100 ms R10 CB1 Trip B Output R11 Dwell 100 ms R11 CB1 Trip C...
Page 598 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-64 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 LED input connection/text Latched P544 LED function indication number LED 1 Red Diff Trip LED 2 Red Dist Inst Trip LED 3 Red Dist Delay Trip LED 4 Red Signaling Fail LED 5 Red Any Start...
Page 599 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-65 LED input connection/text Latched P545 LED function indication number LED 1 Red Diff Trip LED 2 Red Dist Inst Trip LED 3 Red Dist Delay Trip LED 4 Red Signaling Fail LED 5 Red Any Start...
Page 600 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-66 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 LED input connection/text Latched P545 LED function indication number Funky LED5 Red Not Mapped FnKey LED5 Green CB1 AR Successful FnKey LED5 Amber CB1 ARIP Funky LED6 Red CB2 A Open FnKey LED6 Green CB2 A Closed...
Page 601 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-67 MiCOM P543 WITH DISTANCE PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC Output Input Mappings Input L1 Inhibit C Diff DDB #032 DDB #455 Input L2 Recon Interlock DDB #033 DDB #456 Input L3 Aided1 Scheme Rx DDB #034 DDB #493...
Page 602 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-68 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Output Contacts...
Page 603 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-69 Output Contacts...
Page 604 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-70 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 LEDs Diff Trip DDB #582 LED1 Red DDB #1024 Diff InterTrip Latching DDB #586 LED1 Grn DDB #1025 Zone 1 Trip DDB #608 LED2 Red Aid 1 Dist Trip DDB #1026 DDB #503 Latching...
Page 605 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-71 Diff Start A DDB #738 Zone 1 A Start DDB #741 Start Phase Mappings. Zone 2 A Start Used in Fault Record & DDB #745 on LCD Display Zone 3 A Start DDB #749 Zone P A Start...
Page 606 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-72 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 607 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-73 >> page6 Any Ground Start >> page6 Any Phase Start Any Trip DDB #522 I2>1 Start LED5 Red Non - DDB #567 DDB #1032 Latching LED5 Grn I2>2 Start DDB #1033 DDB #568 I2>3 Start...
Page 608 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-74 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Diff Trip A DDB #583 Diff InterTrip A DDB #587 Zone 1 A Trip DDB #609 Zone 2 A Trip DDB #614 Zone 3 A Trip DDB #619 Zone P A Trip DDB #624 Zone 4 A Trip...
Page 609 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-75 Diff Trip C DDB #585 Diff InterTrip C DDB #589 Zone 1 C Trip DDB #611 Zone 2 C Trip DDB #616 Zone 3 C Trip DDB #621 Zone P C Trip DDB #626 Zone 4 C Trip...
Page 610 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-76 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Inputs to Trip Conversion Logic:These Raw trip signals Diff Trip A DDB #583 are then processed in relay fixed logic, to obtain the correct single, or three pole Diff InterTrip A DDB #587 trip response.
Page 611 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-77 AR Trip Test DDB #576 Perm InterTrip DDB #590 Broken Wire Trip DDB #679 Thermal Trip DDB #680 I2>1 Trip DDB #571 I2>2 Trip DDB #572 I2>3 Trip DDB #573 I2>4 Trip DDB #574...
Page 612 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-78 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 page 11 >> Trip Inputs 3Ph Pred. OST DDB #551 DDB #553 Stub Bus Trip DDB #591 Zone 2 Trip DDB #613 Zone 3 Trip DDB #618 Zone P Trip DDB #623 Zone 4 Trip DDB #628...
Page 613 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-79 This logic enables Check Synchro to function only for Live Line / Live Bus conditions. CS1 Enabled DDB #881 Live Bus & CS2 Enabled DDB #886 DDB #882 SysSplit Enabled DDB #885 &...
Page 614 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-80 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 MiCOM P543 WITHOUT DISTANCE PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC Output Input Mappings Inhibit C Diff Input L1 DDB #455 DDB #032 Recon Interlock Input L2 DDB #033 DDB #456 External Trip A Input L6 DDB #037 DDB #535...
Page 615 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-81 Output Contacts Diff Trip DDB #582 Output R1 Straight DDB #000 Diff InterTrip DDB #586 Signalling Fail Output R2 Straight DDB #311 DDB #001 Any Trip Output R3 Dwell DDB #522 DDB #002...
Page 616 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-82 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Output Contacts...
Page 617 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-83 LEDs Diff Trip DDB #582 LED1 Red DDB #1024 Diff InterTrip Latching DDB #586 LED1 Grn DDB #1025 Signalling Fail LED4 Red Non - DDB #311 DDB #1030 Latching LED4 Grn DDB #1031...
Page 618 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-84 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Start Phase Mappings. Used in Fault Record & on LCD Display Diff Start A DDB #738 I>1 Start A DDB #762 Started Phase A I>2 Start A DDB #956 DDB #766 I>3 Start A DDB #770...
Page 619 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-85...
Page 620 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-86 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 621 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-87...
Page 622 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-88 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Diff Trip C DDB #585 Diff InterTrip C DDB #589 I>1 Trip C DDB #658 I>2 Trip C Faulted Phase C DDB #954 DDB #662 I>3 Trip C DDB #666 I>4 Trip C DDB #670...
Page 623 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-89 Inputs to Trip Conversion Logic:These Raw trip signals are then processed in relay fixed logic, to obtain the correct single, or three pole trip response. Diff Trip A DDB #583 Trip Inputs A Diff InterTrip A...
Page 624 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-90 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 625 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-91 This logic enables Check Synchro to function only for Live Line / Live Bus conditions. CS1 Enabled DDB #881 Live Bus & CS2 Enabled DDB #886 DDB #882 SysSplit Enabled DDB #885 &...
Page 626 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-92 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 MiCOM P544 WITH DISTANCE PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC Output Input Mappings...
Page 627 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-93 Output Contacts Zone 1 Trip DDB #608 Output R1 Diff Trip Straight DDB #000 DDB #582 Diff InterTrip DDB #586 Signalling Fail Output R2 Straight DDB #311 DDB #001 Any Trip Output R3 Dwell...
Page 628 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-94 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Output Contacts SG-opto Invalid DDB #288 Prot'n Disabled DDB #289 Static Test Mode DDB #290 Test Loopback DDB #291 Test IM64 DDB #292 VT Fail Alarm DDB #293 CT1 Fail Alarm DDB #294 CT2 Fail Alarm...
Page 629 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-95 Output Contacts...
Page 630 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-96 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 631 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-97...
Page 632 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-98 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Zone 1 N Start DDB #744 Any Ground Start >> page 7 Any Ground Start >> page 7 Any Ground Start >> page 7 Zone 2 N Start DDB #748 Zone 3 N Start DDB #752...
Page 633 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-99...
Page 634 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-100 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Diff Trip A DDB #583 Diff InterTrip A DDB #587 Zone 1 A Trip DDB #609 Zone 2 A Trip DDB #614 Zone 3 A Trip DDB #619 Zone P A Trip DDB #624 Zone 4 A Trip...
Page 635 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-101 Diff Trip C DDB #585 Diff InterTrip C DDB #589 Zone 1 C Trip DDB #611 Zone 2 C Trip DDB #616 Zone 3 C Trip DDB #621 Zone P C Trip DDB #626 Zone 4 C Trip...
Page 636 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-102 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Inputs to Trip Conversion Logic:These Raw trip signals are then processed in relay Diff Trip A fixed logic, to obtain the DDB #583 correct single, or three pole trip response.
Page 637 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-103...
Page 638 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-104 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Power Swing Inhibit WI DDB #297 DDB #458 Any Trip Fault REC TRIG DDB #522 DDB #702...
Page 639 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-105 MiCOM P544 WITHOUT DISTANCE PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC Output Input Mappings Input L1 Inhibit C Diff DDB #032 DDB #455 Block CB1 AR DDB #448 Input L2 Block CB2 AR DDB #033 DDB #1421 Input L6...
Page 640 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-106 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Output Contacts Diff Trip DDB #582 Output R1 Straight DDB #000 Diff InterTrip DDB #586 Signalling Fail Output R2 Straight DDB #311 DDB #001 Any Trip Output R3 Dwell DDB #522 DDB #002...
Page 641 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-107 Output Contacts...
Page 642 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-108 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Output Contacts...
Page 643 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-109 LEDs...
Page 644 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-110 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 645 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-111...
Page 646 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-112 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 >> page 6 Any Ground Start >> page 6 Any Phase Start Any Trip DDB #522 I2>1 Start DDB #567 I2>2 Start DDB #568 I2>3 Start DDB #569 I2>4 Start DDB #570 LED5 Red...
Page 647 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-113...
Page 648 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-114 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Diff Trip C DDB #585 Diff InterTrip C DDB #589 I>1 Trip C DDB #658 Faulted Phase C DDB #954 I>2 Trip C DDB #662 I>3 Trip C DDB #666 I>4 Trip C DDB #670...
Page 649 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-115 Inputs to Trip Conversion Logic:These Raw trip signals are then processed in relay fixed logic, to obtain the correct single, or three pole trip response. Diff Trip A DDB #583 Trip Inputs A DDB #530...
Page 650 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-116 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Perm InterTrip DDB #590 Broken Wire Trip DDB #679 Thermal Trip DDB #680 I2>1 Trip DDB #571 I2>2 Trip DDB #572 I2>3 Trip DDB #573 I2>4 Trip DDB #574 ISEF>1 Trip DDB #675 ISEF>2 Trip...
Page 651 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-117 page 12 >> Trip Inputs 3Ph Stub Bus Trip DDB #591 I>1 Trip DDB #655 I>2 Trip DDB #659 I>3 Trip DDB #663 I>4 Trip DDB #667 IN>1 Trip DDB #671 IN>2 Trip DDB #672...
Page 652 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-118 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 MiCOM P545 WITH DISTANCE PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC Output Input Mappings...
Page 653 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-119 Output Contacts...
Page 654 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-120 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Output Contacts Output Contacts SG-opto Invalid DDB #288 Prot'n Disabled DDB #289 Static Test Mode DDB #290 Test Loopback DDB #291 Test IM64 DDB #292 VT Fail Alarm DDB #293 CT Fail Alarm DDB #294...
Page 655 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-121 Output Contacts...
Page 656 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-122 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 LEDs...
Page 657 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-123 Diff Start A DDB #738 Zone 1 A Start DDB #741 Start Phase Mappings. Used in Fault Record & Zone 2 A Start on LCD Display DDB #745 Zone 3 A Start DDB #749 Zone P A Start...
Page 658 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-124 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Zone 1 N Start DDB #744 Zone 2 N Start Any Ground Start >> page8 DDB #748 Zone 3 N Start DDB #752 Zone P N Start DDB #756 Zone 4 N Start DDB #760 IN>1 Start...
Page 659 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-125 >> page7 Any Ground Start >> page7 Any Phase Start LED5 Red Non - DDB #1032 Latching LED5 Grn Any Trip DDB #1033 DDB #522 I2>1 Start DDB #567 Output R23 I2>2 Start Straight...
Page 660 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-126 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Diff Trip A DDB #583 Diff InterTrip A DDB #587 Zone 1 A Trip DDB #609 Zone 2 A Trip DDB #614 Zone 3 A Trip DDB #619 Zone P A Trip DDB #624 Zone 4 A Trip...
Page 661 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-127 Diff Trip C DDB #585 Diff InterTrip C DDB #589 Zone 1 C Trip DDB #611 Zone 2 C Trip DDB #616 Zone 3 C Trip DDB #621 Zone P C Trip DDB #626 Zone 4 C Trip...
Page 662 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-128 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Diff Trip A Inputs to Trip Conversion DDB #583 Logic:These Raw trip signals are then processed in relay fixed logic, to obtain the Diff InterTrip A DDB #587 correct single, or three pole trip response.
Page 663 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-129...
Page 664 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-130 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 page 12 >> Trip Inputs 3Ph Pred. OST DDB #551 DDB #553 Stub Bus Trip DDB #591 Zone 2 Trip DDB #613 Zone 3 Trip DDB #618 Zone P Trip DDB #623 Zone 4 Trip DDB #628...
Page 665 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-131 This logic enables Check Synchro to function only for Live Line / Live Bus conditions. CS1 Enabled DDB #881 Live Bus & CS2 Enabled DDB #886 DDB #882 SysSplit Enabled DDB #885 &...
Page 666 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-132 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 MiCOM P545 WITHOUT DISTANCE PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC Output Input Mappings Input L1 Inhibit C Diff DDB #455 DDB #032 Recon Interlock Input L2 DDB #033 DDB #456 External Trip A Input L6 DDB #535 DDB #037...
Page 667 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-133 Output Contacts...
Page 668 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-134 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Output Contacts SG-opto Invalid DDB #288 Prot'n Disabled DDB #289 Test Loopback DDB #291 Test IM64 DDB #292 VT Fail Alarm DDB #293 CT Fail Alarm DDB #294 Remote CT Alarm DDB #296 CB Fail Alarm...
Page 669 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-135 Output Contacts...
Page 670 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-136 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 LEDs Diff Trip DDB #582 LED1 Red DDB #1024 Latching LED1 Grn Diff InterTrip DDB #1025 DDB #586 LED4 Red Signalling Fail Non - DDB #311 DDB #1030 Latching LED4 Grn DDB #1031...
Page 671 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-137...
Page 672 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-138 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 673 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-139 >> page7 Any Ground Start >> page7 Any Phase Start Any Trip DDB #522 LED5 Red I2>1 Start Non - DDB #1032 DDB #567 Latching LED5 Grn DDB #1033 I2>2 Start DDB #568 Output R23...
Page 674 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-140 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Diff Trip A DDB #583 Diff InterTrip A DDB #587 I>1 Trip A DDB #656 Faulted Phase A I>2 Trip A DDB #952 DDB #660 I>3 Trip A DDB #664 I>4 Trip A DDB #668...
Page 675 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-141 Diff Trip C DDB #585 Diff InterTrip C DDB #589 I>1 Trip C DDB #658 Faulted Phase C I>2 Trip C DDB #954 DDB #662 I>3 Trip C DDB #666 I>4 Trip C DDB #670...
Page 676 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-142 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 677 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-143 I2>1 Trip DDB #571 I2>2 Trip DDB #572 I2>3 Trip DDB #573 I2>4 Trip DDB #574 AR Trip Test DDB #576 Perm InterTrip DDB #590 Stub Bus Trip DDB #591 I>1 Trip DDB #655...
Page 678 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-144 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 This logic enables Check Synchro to function only for Live Line / Live Bus conditions. CS1 Enabled DDB #881 Live Bus & CS2 Enabled DDB #886 DDB #882 SysSplit Enabled DDB #885 &...
Page 679 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-145 MiCOM P546 WITH DISTANCE PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC Output Input Mappings Input L1 Inhibit C Diff DDB #032 DDB #455 Block CB1 AR DDB #448 Input L2 Block CB2 AR DDB #033 DDB #1421 Input L3...
Page 680 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-146 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Output Contacts Output Contacts Zone 1 Trip Output R1 Straight DDB #608 DDB #000 Signalling Fail Output R2 Straight DDB #311 DDB #001 Any Trip Output R3 Dwell DDB #522 DDB #002 IM64 Ch1 Input 1...
Page 681 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-147 Output Contacts...
Page 682 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-148 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Output Contacts CB2 Fail Alarm DDB #320 CB2 Status Alm DDB #323 CB2 Monitor Alm DDB #321 CB2 Mon LO Alarm DDB #322 NoCS CB2ManClose DDB #327 CB2 AR Lockout DDB #328 AR CB2 No C/S DDB #330...
Page 683 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-149 Output Contacts Trip Outputs CB2 Trip OutputA Output R17 Dwell DDB #1601 DDB #016 generated by the internal single/three phase trip CB2 Trip OutputB Output R18 Dwell DDB #1602 DDB #017 conversion logic.
Page 684 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-150 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Diff Start A DDB #738 Zone 1 A Start DDB #741 Start Phase Mappings. Zone 2 A Start Used in Fault Record & DDB #745 on LCD Display Zone 3 A Start DDB #749 Zone P A Start...
Page 685 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-151 Zone 1 N Start DDB #744 Zone 2 N Start Any Ground Start >> page8 Any Ground Start >> page8 Any Ground Start >> page8 DDB #748 Zone 3 N Start DDB #752 Zone P N Start DDB #756...
Page 686 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-152 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 >> page7 Any Ground Start >> page7 Any Phase Start LED5 Red Non - DDB #1032 Latching LED5 Grn Any Trip DDB #1033 DDB #522 I2>1 Start DDB #567 Output R23 Straight DDB #022...
Page 687 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-153 Diff Trip A DDB #583 Diff InterTrip A DDB #587 Zone 1 A Trip DDB #609 Zone 2 A Trip DDB #614 Zone 3 A Trip DDB #619 Zone P A Trip DDB #624 Zone 4 A Trip...
Page 688 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-154 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 689 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-155...
Page 690 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-156 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 691 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-157 page 12 >> Trip Inputs 3Ph Pred. OST DDB #551 DDB #553 Stub Bus Trip DDB #591 Zone 2 Trip DDB #613 Zone 3 Trip DDB #618 Zone P Trip DDB #623 Zone 4 Trip DDB #628...
Page 692 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-158 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 LEDs LEDs Diff Trip DDB #582 LED1 Red DDB #1024 Diff InterTrip Latching DDB #586 LED1 Grn DDB #1025 Zone 1 Trip DDB #608 LED2 Red Aid 1 Dist Trip DDB #1026 DDB #503 Latching...
Page 693 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-159 MiCOM P546 WITHOUT DISTANCE PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC Output Input Mappings...
Page 694 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-160 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Output Contacts Signalling Fail Output R2 Straight DDB #311 DDB #001 Output R3 Any Trip Dwell DDB #522 DDB #002 IM64 Ch1 Input 1 DDB #096 Output R5 Straight DDB #004 IM64 Ch2 Input 1...
Page 695 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-161 Output Contacts SG-opto Invalid DDB #288 Prot'n Disabled DDB #289 Test Loopback DDB #291 Test IM64 DDB #292 VT Fail Alarm DDB #293 CT1 Fail Alarm DDB #294 CT2 Fail Alarm DDB #295 Remote CT Alarm...
Page 696 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-162 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Output Contacts...
Page 697 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-163 Output Contacts Trip Outputs CB2 Trip OutputA Output R17 Dwell DDB #1601 DDB #016 generated by the internal single/three phase trip CB2 Trip OutputB Output R18 Dwell DDB #1602 DDB #017 conversion logic.
Page 698 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-164 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 699 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-165 Any Ground Start >> page8 IN>1 Start DDB #777 IN>2 Start DDB #778 IN>3 Start DDB #779 IN>4 Start DDB #780 ISEF>1 Start Started Phase N DDB #781 DDB #959 ISEF>2 Start DDB #782...
Page 700 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-166 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 >> page7 Any Ground Start >> page7 Any Phase Start LED5 Red Non - DDB #1032 Latching LED5 Grn Any Trip DDB #1033 DDB #522 I2>1 Start DDB #567 Output R23 Straight DDB #022...
Page 701 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-167...
Page 702 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-168 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Diff Trip C DDB #585 Diff InterTrip C DDB #589 Faulted Phase C I>1 Trip C DDB #954 DDB #658 I>2 Trip C DDB #662 I>3 Trip C DDB #666 I>4 Trip C DDB #670...
Page 703 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-169...
Page 704 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-170 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 705 Programmable Logic P54x/EN PL/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (PL) 7-171...
Page 706 P54x/EN PL/La4 Programmable Logic (PL) 7-172 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 LEDs...
Page 707: P54X/En Mr/La4
Measurements and Recording P54x/EN MR/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 MEASUREMENTS AND RECORDING Date: March 2009 Hardware Suffix: Software Version: 45 (P543/4/5/6 without Distance) 55 (P543/4/5/6 with Distance) Connection Diagrams: 10P54302 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54303 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54400 10P54404 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54405 (SH 1 to 2)
Page 708 P54x/EN MR/La4 Measurements and Recording MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 709 Measurements and Recording P54x/EN MR/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (MR) 8-1 CONTENTS (MR) 8- MEASUREMENTS AND RECORDING Introduction Event & fault records 1.2.1 Types of event 1.2.1.1 Change of state of opto-isolated inputs 1.2.1.2 Change of state of one or more output relay contacts 1.2.1.3 Relay alarm conditions 1.2.1.4...
Page 710 P54x/EN MR/La4 Measurements and Recording (MR) 8-2 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 711 Measurements and Recording P54x/EN MR/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (MR) 8-3 MEASUREMENTS AND RECORDING Introduction The P54x is equipped with integral measurements, event, fault and disturbance recording facilities suitable for analysis of complex system disturbances. The relay is flexible enough to allow for the programming of these facilities to specific user application requirements and are discussed below.
Page 712 P54x/EN MR/La4 Measurements and Recording (MR) 8-4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 For extraction from a remote source via communications, refer to the SCADA Communications chapter (P54x/EN SC), where the procedure is fully explained. 1.2.1 Types of event An event may be a change of state of a control input or output relay, an alarm condition, setting change etc.
Page 713 Measurements and Recording P54x/EN MR/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (MR) 8-5 1.2.1.4 Protection element starts and trips Any operation of protection elements, (either a start or a trip condition) will be logged as an event record, consisting of a text string indicating the operated element and an event value. Again, this value is intended for use by the event extraction software, such as MiCOM S1 Studio, rather than for the user, and is therefore invisible when the event is viewed on the LCD.
Page 714 P54x/EN MR/La4 Measurements and Recording (MR) 8-6 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 1.2.1.8 Setting changes Changes to any setting within the relay are logged as an event. Two examples are shown in the following table: Type of setting change Displayed text in event record Displayed value Control/Support Setting...
Page 715 Measurements and Recording P54x/EN MR/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (MR) 8-7 - Monday 27 October 2008 15:35:55 GMT A/R Lockout ON MiCOM : MiCOM P54x Model Number: P543218A1M054/50K Address: 001 Column: 00 Row: 22 Event Type: Alarm event - Tuesday 28 October 2008 20:18:22.988 GMT Zone 1 Trip ON MiCOM : MiCOM P54x Model Number: P543218A1M054/50K...
Page 716 P54x/EN MR/La4 Measurements and Recording (MR) 8-8 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Menu text Default setting Available settings Maint. Rec. Event Enabled Enabled or Disabled Disabling this setting means that no event will be generated for any occurrence that produces a maintenance record.
Page 717 Measurements and Recording P54x/EN MR/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (MR) 8-9 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. DISTURB. RECORDER Duration 1.5 s 0.1 s 10.5 s 0.01 s This sets the overall recording time. Trigger Position 33.3% 100%...
Page 718 P54x/EN MR/La4 Measurements and Recording (MR) 8-10 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Setting range Menu text Default setting Step size Min. Max. N (P543/5) Analog. Channel 11 As above IB2 (P544/6) N (P543/5) Analog. Channel 12 As above IC2 (P544/6) The pre and post fault recording times are set by a combination of the Duration and Trigger Position cells.
Page 719 Measurements and Recording P54x/EN MR/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (MR) 8-11 1.4.1 Measured voltages and currents The relay produces both phase to ground and phase to phase voltage and current values. They are produced directly from the DFT (Discrete Fourier Transform) used by the relay protection functions and present both magnitude and phase angle measurement.
Page 720 P54x/EN MR/La4 Measurements and Recording (MR) 8-12 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 1.4.5 Rms. voltages and currents Rms. phase voltage and current values are calculated by the relay using the sum of the samples squared over a cycle of sampled data. 1.4.6 Demand values The relay produces fixed, rolling and peak demand values, using the reset demand menu...
Page 721 Measurements and Recording P54x/EN MR/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (MR) 8-13 Menu text Default settings Available settings MEASUREMENT SETUP Fix Dem. Period 30 minutes 1 to 99 minutes step 1 minute This setting defines the length of the fixed demand window. Roll Sub Period 30 minutes 1 to 99 minutes step 1 minute...
Page 722 P54x/EN MR/La4 Measurements and Recording (MR) 8-14 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 MEASUREMENTS 1 MEASUREMENTS 2 MEASUREMENTS 3 MEASUREMENTS 4 Max Ch 1 Prop VCA Phase Angle 0 deg IA Fixed Demand IB Bias Delay Max Ch 2 Prop VAN Magnitude IB Fixed Demand IC Bias...
Page 723 Measurements and Recording P54x/EN MR/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (MR) 8-15 MEASUREMENTS 4 Column: Channel 1 and Channel 2 propagation times are displayed in seconds. These times are the ones calculated with asynchronous sampling (some times called “ping pong” method). Ch1/Ch2 Rx Prop Delay Ch1 and Ch1/Ch2 Tx Prop Delay are displayed in seconds.
Page 724 P54x/EN MR/La4 Measurements and Recording (MR) 8-16 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 ‘Ch1/Ch2 No. Errored seconds’ displays the number of seconds containing 1 or more errored or lost messages ‘Ch1/Ch2 No. Severely Errored sconds‘ displays the number of seconds containing 31 or (1).
Page 725: P54X/En Fd/La4
Firmware Design P54x/EN FD/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 FIRMWARE DESIGN Date: March 2009 Hardware Suffix: Software Version: 45 (P543/4/5/6 without Distance) 55 (P543/4/5/6 with Distance) Connection Diagrams: 10P54302 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54303 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54400 10P54404 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54405 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54502 (SH 1 to 2)
Page 726 P54x/EN FD/La4 Firmware Design MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 727 Firmware Design P54x/EN FD/La4 (FD) 9-1 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 CONTENTS (FD) 9- RELAY SYSTEM OVERVIEW Hardware overview 1.1.1 Processor board 1.1.2 Co-processor board (optionally with interMiCOM fiber teleprotection) 1.1.3 Analog/digital input module 1.1.4 Power supply module 1.1.5 IRIG-B modulated or demodulated board (optional) 1.1.6 Second rear comms and EIA(RS)232 interMiCOM...
Page 728 P54x/EN FD/La4 Firmware Design (FD) 9-2 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 3.3.2 Settings database 3.3.3 Database interface Protection and control software 3.4.1 Overview - protection and control scheduling 3.4.2 Signal processing 3.4.3 Main protection digital filtering 3.4.3.1 Differential protection 3.4.3.2 Distance protection 3.4.3.3...
Page 729 Firmware Design P54x/EN FD/La4 (FD) 9-3 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 RELAY SYSTEM OVERVIEW Hardware overview The relay hardware is based on a modular design whereby the relay is made up of an assemblage of several modules which are drawn from a standard range. Some modules are essential while others are optional depending on the user’s requirements.
Page 730 P54x/EN FD/La4 Firmware Design (FD) 9-4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 1.1.7 Ethernet board This board provides the Ethernet connectivity for protocols support on that Media. It provides network connectivity through either copper or fiber media at rates of 10 Mb/s (copper only) or 100 Mb/s.
Page 731 Firmware Design P54x/EN FD/La4 (FD) 9-5 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Software overview The software for the relay can be conceptually split into four elements; the real-time operating system, the system services software, the platform software and the protection and control software.
Page 732 P54x/EN FD/La4 Firmware Design (FD) 9-6 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 HARDWARE MODULES The relay is based on a modular hardware design where each module performs a separate function within the relay operation. This section describes the functional operation of the various hardware modules.
Page 733 Firmware Design P54x/EN FD/La4 (FD) 9-7 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Input module The input module provides the interface between the relay processor board and the analog and digital signals coming into the relay. The input module consists of two or three PCBs; the main input board and one or two transformer board(s).
Page 734 P54x/EN FD/La4 Firmware Design (FD) 9-8 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 The calibration non-volatile memory holds the calibration coefficients which are used by the processor board to correct for any amplitude or phase errors introduced by the transformers and analog circuitry. The other function of the input board is to read the state of the signals present on the digital inputs and present this to the parallel data bus for processing.
Page 735 Firmware Design P54x/EN FD/La4 (FD) 9-9 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 2.5.1 Power supply board (including EIA(RS)485 communication interface) One of three different configurations of the power supply board can be fitted to the relay. This will be specified at the time of order and depends on the nature of the supply voltage that will be connected to the relay.
Page 736 P54x/EN FD/La4 Firmware Design (FD) 9-10 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Note: These relay contacts are POLARITY SENSITIVE. External wiring must comply with the polarity requirements described in the external connection diagram to ensure correct operation. This board contains a hybrid of MOSFET solid state devices (SSD) in parallel with high capacity relay output contacts.
Page 737 Firmware Design P54x/EN FD/La4 (FD) 9-11 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 3) Breaker fail The technique to use 52a contacts in trip circuits was described above. However, in the event of failure of the local circuit breaker (stuck breaker), or defective auxiliary contacts (stuck contacts), the 52a contact action is incorrect.
Page 738 P54x/EN FD/La4 Firmware Design (FD) 9-12 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Language: Optional IRIG-B Courier always Physical links: Courier Port EIA 232 (EIA232/EIA485) EIA 485 (polarity sensitive) Not used (EIA232) K-Bus (non polarity sensitive) Physical links are s/w selectable P2083ENa Figure 4 Second rear comms board (optional)
Page 739 Firmware Design P54x/EN FD/La4 (FD) 9-13 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Modulated or Demodulated IRIG-B 10 Base- T/100 Base- Tx (RJ45) Link activity LEDs 100 Base-FX (ST type) P1980ENa Figure 5 Ethernet board (optional) Mechanical layout The case materials of the relay are constructed from pre-finished steel that has a conductive covering of aluminum and zinc.
Page 740 P54x/EN FD/La4 Firmware Design (FD) 9-14 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 RELAY SOFTWARE The software can be considered to be made up of four sections:  The real-time operating system  The system services software  The platform software ...
Page 741 Firmware Design P54x/EN FD/La4 (FD) 9-15 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Platform software The platform software has three main functions:  To control the logging of records that are generated by the protection software, including alarms and event, fault, and maintenance records ...
Page 742 P54x/EN FD/La4 Firmware Design (FD) 9-16 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 3.4.1 Overview - protection and control scheduling After initialization at start-up, the protection and control task on the main processor board is suspended until the co-processor board re-starts via an interrupt. In the case where the co- processor board has failed, the protection task will automatically start after six analog samples have been received.
Page 743 Firmware Design P54x/EN FD/La4 (FD) 9-17 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 3.4.3.2 Distance protection The current and voltage inputs are filtered, using finite impulse response (FIR) digital filters to reduce the effects of non-power frequency components in the input signals, such as DC offsets in current waveforms, and capacitor voltage transformer (CVT) transients in the voltages.
Page 744 P54x/EN FD/La4 Firmware Design (FD) 9-18 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 The execution of the PSL logic is event driven; the logic is processed whenever any of its inputs change, for example as a result of a change in one of the digital input signals or a trip output from a protection element.
Page 745 Firmware Design P54x/EN FD/La4 (FD) 9-19 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 SELF TESTING & DIAGNOSTICS The relay includes a number of self-monitoring functions to check the operation of its hardware and software when it is in service. These are included so that if an error or fault occurs within the relay’s hardware or software, the relay is able to detect and report the problem and attempt to resolve it by performing a re-boot.
Page 746 P54x/EN FD/La4 Firmware Design (FD) 9-20 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Any of these checks which produces an error results in the co-processor board being left out of service and the relay relying on the other protection functions which are provided by the main processor board.
Page 747: P54X/En Cm/La4
Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 COMMISSIONING March 2009 Date: Hardware Suffix: 45 (P543/4/5/6 without Distance) Software Version: 55 (P543/4/5/6 with Distance) Connection Diagrams: 10P54302 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54303 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54400 10P54404 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54405 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54502 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54503 (SH 1 to 2)
Page 748 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 749 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-1 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 CONTENTS (CM) 10- INTRODUCTION COMMISSIONING TESTS - RELAY FACILITIES Opto I/P status Relay O/P status Test port status Red LED status and green LED status Monitor bits 1 to 8 Test mode Test pattern Contact test...
Page 750 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-2 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 5.2.4.2 Testing the trip LED 5.2.4.3 Testing the user-programmable LEDs 5.2.5 Field voltage supply 5.2.6 Input opto-isolators 5.2.7 Output relays 5.2.8 Rear communications port 5.2.8.1 Courier communications 5.2.8.2 IEC 60870-5-103 (VDEW) communications 5.2.8.3 DNP3.0 interface 5.2.9...
Page 751 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-3 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 6.1.6 Communications using P593 interface units (X.21) 6.1.6.1 P593 visual inspection 6.1.6.2 P593 insulation 6.1.6.3 P593 external wiring 6.1.6.4 P593 auxiliary supply 6.1.6.5 P593 light emitting diodes (LEDs) 6.1.6.6 P593 optical received signal level 6.1.6.7 P593 loopback test...
Page 752 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 8.4.2.8 Load blinder 8.4.3 Distance protection operation and contact assignment 8.4.3.1 Phase A 8.4.3.2 Phase B 8.4.3.3 Phase C 8.4.3.4 Time delay settings tZ1 Ph, and tZ2 - tZ4 8.4.4 Distance protection scheme testing 8.4.4.1...
Page 753 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-5 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Remove local loopbacks 9.1.1 Direct fiber and C37.94 connections 9.1.1.1 Direct fiber connections 9.1.1.2 Fiber connections to C37.94 9.1.2 Communications using P591 interface units 9.1.3 Communications using P592 interface units 9.1.4 Communications using P593 interface units Remote loopback removal...
Page 754 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-6 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 755 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-7 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 INTRODUCTION The P54x employs a high degree of self-checking and, in the unlikely event of a failure, will give an alarm. As a result of this, the commissioning tests do not need to be as extensive as with non-numeric electronic or electro-mechanical relays.
Page 756 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-8 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 COMMISSIONING TESTS - RELAY FACILITIES To help minimize the time required to test MiCOM relays the relay provides several test facilities under the ‘COMMISSION TESTS’ menu heading. There are menu cells which allow the status of the opto-isolated inputs, output relay contacts, internal digital data bus (DDB) signals and user-programmable LEDs to be monitored.
Page 757 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-9 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Opto I/P status This menu cell displays the status of the relay’s opto-isolated inputs as a binary string, a ‘1’ indicating an energized opto-isolated input and a ‘0’ a de-energized one. If the cursor is moved along the binary numbers the corresponding label text will be displayed for each logic input.
Page 758 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-10 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Test mode This menu cell is to allow secondary injection testing to be performed on the relay. It also enables a facility to directly test the output contacts by applying menu controlled test signals. To select test mode the option ‘Test Mode’...
Page 759 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-11 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Note: The default settings for the relay’s programmable scheme logic has the ‘AR Trip Test’ signals mapped to the ‘Trip Input’ signals as shown in Figure 1 (P543 & P545 software version 54) and Figure 2 (P544 & P546 software version 55).
Page 760 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-12 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 As the P54x relies on voltage memories and delta step changes as would happen on a real power system, certain functions within the relay must be disabled or bypassed to allow injection testing.
Page 761 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-13 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 SETTING FAMILIARIZATION When commissioning a relay P54x for the first time, sufficient time should be allowed to become familiar with the method by which the settings are applied. The Introduction (P54x/EN GS) contains a detailed description of the menu structure of P54x relays.
Page 762 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-14 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR COMMISSIONING Minimum equipment required Multifunctional dynamic current and voltage injection test set. Multimeter with suitable ac current range, and ac and dc voltage ranges of 0 - 440 V and 0 - 250 V respectively.
Page 763 Note: In the event that the password has been lost, a recovery password can be obtained from ALSTOM Grid by quoting the serial number of the relay. The recovery password is unique to that relay and is unlikely to work on any other relay.
Page 764 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-16 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 5.1.1 Visual inspection The rating information given under the top access cover on the front of the relay should be checked. Check that the relay being tested is correct for the protected line/circuit.
Page 765 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-17 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Shorting contact between terminals Current input P543 P544 P545 P546 1 A - common – 5 A A C3 - C2 - C1 C3 - C2 – C1 D3 - D2 - D1 D3 - D2 - D1 B C6 - C5 - C4...
Page 766 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-18 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 5.1.3 Insulation Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if it is required for them to be done and they have not been performed during installation. Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the insulation with an electronic or brushless insulation tester at a dc voltage not exceeding 500 V.
Page 767 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-19 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 5.1.6 Auxiliary supply The relay can be operated from either a dc only or AC/DC auxiliary supply depending on the relay’s nominal supply rating. The incoming voltage must be within the operating range specified in the table below.
Page 768 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-20 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 5.2.3 Date and time Before setting the date and time, ensure that the factory-fitted battery isolation strip, that prevents battery drain during transportation and storage, has been removed. With the lower access cover open, presence of the battery isolation strip can be checked by a red tab protruding from the positive side of the battery compartment.
Page 769 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-21 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 5.2.4 Light emitting diodes (LEDs) On power up the green LED should have illuminated and stayed on indicating that the relay is healthy. The relay has non-volatile memory which remembers the state (on or off) of the alarm, trip and, if configured to latch, user-programmable LED indicators when the relay was last energized from an auxiliary supply.
Page 770 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-22 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 5.2.6 Input opto-isolators This test checks that all the opto-isolated inputs on the relay are functioning correctly.  P543 and P544 have 16 opto inputs  P545 and P546 have 24 opto inputs The opto-isolated inputs should be energized one at a time, see external connection diagrams (P54x/EN IN) for terminal numbers.
Page 771 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-23 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 5.2.8 Rear communications port This test should only be performed where the relay is to be accessed from a remote location and will vary depending on the communications standard being adopted. It is not the intention of the test to verify the operation of the complete system from the relay to the remote location, just the relay’s rear communications port and any protocol converter necessary.
Page 772 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-24 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 5.2.9 Second rear communications port This test should only be performed where the relay is to be accessed from a remote location and will vary depending on the communications standard being adopted. It is not the intention of the test to verify the operation of the complete system from the relay to the remote location, just the relays rear communications port and any protocol converter necessary.
Page 773 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-25 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Connection No Connection DTR# Ground No Connection RTS# CTS# No Connection Table 7: Second rear communications port EIA(RS)232 terminals # - These pins are control lines for use with a modem. Connections to the second rear port configured for EIA(RS)232 operation can be made using a screened multi-core communication cable up to 15 m long, or a total capacitance of 2500 pF.
Page 774 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-26 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Shorting contact between terminals Current P543 P544 P545 P546 input 1 A - common - 5 A  C3 - C2 - C1 C3 - C2 - C1 D3 - D2 - D1 D3 - D2 - D1 ...
Page 775 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-27 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Note: If a PC connected to the relay via the rear communications port is being used to display the measured voltage, the process will be similar. However, the setting of cell [0D03: MEASURE’T SETUP, Remote Values] will determine whether the displayed values are in primary or secondary Volts.
Page 776 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-28 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 PROTECTION COMMUNICATIONS LOOPBACK If, as is likely to be the case, the P54x relay is being used in a scheme with phase differential or InterMiCOM communications it will be necessary to configure a loopback on the communications.
Page 777 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-29 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 6.1.1 Communications loopback setting The loopback test can be used to establish correct operation of the local communication interface. In loopback mode the signals sent and received via the communications interface continue to be routed to and from the signals defined in the programmable logic.
Page 778 The connection diagram number appears on the rating label under the top access cover on the front of the P591. The corresponding connection diagram will have been supplied with the ALSTOM Grid order acknowledgement for the P591. It is especially important that the dc supplies are wired with the correct polarity.
Page 779 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-31 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 6.1.4.6 P591 optical received signal level With an optical cable connected to the P54x optical transmitter as instructed in section 6.1.2, disconnect the other end of the cable from the P591 receiver (RX) and use an optical power meter to measure the received signal strength.
Page 780 The connection diagram number appears on the rating label under the top access cover on the front of the P592. The corresponding connection diagram will have been supplied with the ALSTOM Grid order acknowledgement for the P592. It is especially important that the dc supplies are wired with the correct polarity.
Page 781 The connection diagram number appears on the rating label under the top access cover on the front of the P593. The corresponding connection diagram will have been supplied with the ALSTOM Grid order acknowledgement for the P593. It is especially important that the dc supplies are wired with the correct polarity.
Page 782 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-34 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 6.1.6.4 P593 auxiliary supply P593 units operate from a dc only auxiliary supply within the operative range of 19.5 V to 300 V. Without energizing the P593 units measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it is within the operating range.
Page 783 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-35 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 6.1.7 Loopback test Set cell [0F14 IM64 Test Mode] to ‘Enabled’, and use cell [0F15 IM64 Test Pattern] to set a bit pattern to be sent via the InterMiCOM loopback.
Page 784 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-36 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 GPS SYNCHRONIZATION The P54x has a feature whereby the timing information used to align the local and remote current vectors used in the phase differential algorithm can be very accurately synchronized via the global positioning satellite (GPS) system.
Page 785 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-37 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 SETTING CHECKS The setting checks ensure that all of the application-specific relay settings (i.e. both the relay’s function and programmable scheme logic settings), for the particular installation, have been correctly applied to the relay. If the application-specific settings are not available, ignore sections 8.1 and 8.2.
Page 786 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-38 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Demonstrate correct relay operation Tests 5.2.10 and 5.2.11 have already demonstrated that the relay is within calibration, thus the purpose of these tests is as follows:  To determine that the primary protection function of the relay, current differential or distance can trip according to the correct application settings ...
Page 787 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-39 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (NOTE: 1pu = 1A into terminals C3-C2 for 1 A applications; or 1 pu = 5 A into terminals C1-C2 for 5 A applications). The relay will trip and any contacts associated with the A-phase will operate, and bit 1 (rightmost) of [0F03: Test Port Status] will be set to 1.
Page 788 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-40 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 For other differential settings or current injected into A phase (I ), the formula below can be used (enter slopes in pu form, i.e. percentage/100): 2 Terminal & Dual Redundant: ) x ...
Page 789 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-41 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Demonstrate correct relay operation – non-current differential elements 8.4.1 Protection dependencies The principle non-differential protection elements (distance, overcurrent, and earth fault) can be set to have dependencies the availability of the phase differential and the status of the voltage transformer supervision function (VTS).
Page 790 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-42 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 In order to facilitate testing of the Distance elements using test sets which do not provide a dynamic model to generate true fault delta conditions, a Static Test Mode setting is provided.
Page 791 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-43 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 8.4.2.4 Zone 3 reach check The zone 3 element is set to be directional forward. Apply a dynamic C-A fault, slightly in excess of the expected reach. The duration of the injection should be in excess of the tZ3 timer setting (typically tZ3 + 100 ms).
Page 792 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-44 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 8.4.3 Distance protection operation and contact assignment 8.4.3.1 Phase A Prepare a dynamic A phase to neutral fault, at half the Zone 1 reach. Connect a timer to start when the fault injection is applied, and to stop when the trip occurs. To verify correct output contact mapping use the trip contacts that would be expected to trip the circuit breaker(s), as shown in the table.
Page 793 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-45 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 8.4.4 Distance protection scheme testing The relay will be tested for it’s response to internal and external fault simulations, but the engineer must note that the response will depend upon the aided channel (pilot) scheme that is selected.
Page 794 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-46 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 8.4.4.1 Scheme trip test for zone 1 extension only The Reset Zone 1 Extension opto input should first be ON (energized). This should be performed by applying a continuous DC voltage onto the required opto input, either from the test set, station battery, or relay field voltage (commissioning engineer to ascertain the best method).
Page 795 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-47 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 8.4.4.4 Signal send test for permissive schemes (PUR/POR only) This test applies to both Permissive Underreach, and Permissive Overreach scheme applications. Firstly, reconnect the test set so that the timer is no longer stopped by the Trip contact, but is now stopped by the Signal Send contact (the contact that would normally be connected to the pilot/signaling channel).
Page 796 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-48 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 8.4.6.2 Single-ended injection test This set of injection tests aims to determine that a single MiCOMho P54x relay, at one end of the scheme is performing correctly. The relay is tested in isolation, with the communications channel to the remote line terminal disconnected.
Page 797 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-49 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 8.4.7.1 Phase A Prepare a dynamic A phase to neutral fault, as detailed above. Ensure that the test set is simulating Steps 1 and 2 as one continuous transition. Connect a timer to start when the fault injection (Step 2) is applied, and to stop when the trip occurs.
Page 798 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-50 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 The fault current on the A-phase should be set to 3 times the [3316: I Rev] setting, and in antiphase to the forward injections, i.e: Ia = 3 x I Rev  180˚ -  Line Phases B and C should retain their healthy prefault voltage, and no current.
Page 799 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-51 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 State 4 State 3 State 2 State 1 ∆R P1982ENa Figure 6 Four state impedances Depending on the Out of Step settings, follow one of the three options. 8.4.9.1 Predictive OST setting Clear all alarms.
Page 800 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-52 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 8.4.9.2 OST setting Clear all alarms. Set Tost to zero. Based on healthy voltages (VA = VB = VC = 57.8 V) calculate the currents to generate the impedances as per Table 12. State 1 State 2 State 3...
Page 801 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-53 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 8.4.10.1 Connect the test circuit Determine which output relay(s) has/have been selected to operate when a DEF trip occurs by viewing the relay’s programmable scheme logic. If the trip outputs are phase-segregated (i.e. a different output relay allocated for each phase), the relay assigned for tripping on ‘A’...
Page 802 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-54 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 8.4.11 DEF aided scheme - scheme testing 8.4.11.1 Signal send test for permissive schemes (POR/POTT only) Firstly, reconnect the test set so that the timer is no longer stopped by the Trip contact, but is now stopped by the Signal Send contact (the contact that would normally be connected to the pilot/signaling channel).
Page 803 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-55 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 If cell [3503: GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, >1 Directional] has been set to ‘Directional Fwd’ or ‘Directional Rev’ then rated voltage should be applied to terminals C20 and C21. Ensure that the timer will start when the current is applied to the relay. Note: If the timer does not stop when the current is applied and stage 1 has been set for directional operation, the connections may be incorrect...
Page 804 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-56 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 8.4.13 Restoration of communications and clearing VTS If, during the testing described in section 8.4 above, it was necessary to create communication failure conditions and/or VTS alarm conditions, these should be cleared now. If communications failure was achieved by setting cell [0F13: Test Loopback] to Disabled, then this should be reset to Enabled.
Page 805 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-57 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 END TO END PROTECTION COMMUNICATION TESTS If, as is likely to be the case, the P54x relay is being used in a scheme with phase differential or InterMiCOM communications it will be necessary to perform end-to-end tests of the protection communications channels.
Page 806 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-58 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Relays 850 nm 1300 nm 1300 nm manufactured pre multi-mode multi-mode single-mode April 2008 Maximum transmitter power -16.8 dBm -6 dBm -6 dBm (average value) Minimum transmitter power -25.4 dBm -49 dBm -49 dBm (average value)
Page 807 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-59 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 9.1.3 Communications using P592 interface units Return to the P592 units. Ensure that all external wiring that has been removed to facilitate testing is replaced in accordance with the relevant connection diagram or scheme diagram. Set the ‘V.35 LOOPBACK’...
Page 808 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-60 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 END-TO-END SCHEME TESTS If an external signalling channel is being employed to provide aided scheme signalling (i.e. an aided protection scheme is being realised without InterMiCOM protection signalling, it should be tested.
Page 809 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-61 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 DDB No. Monitor Bit Contact Test OFF Contact Test Applied (ON) Test OFF Note: “x” = Wildcard/denotes don’t care. Return the relay to service by setting cell [0F0D: COMMISSION TESTS, Test Mode] to ‘Disabled’.
Page 810 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-62 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 ON-LOAD CHECKS The objectives of the on-load checks are to:  Confirm the external wiring to the current and voltage inputs is correct  Measure the magnitude of capacitive current ...
Page 811 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-63 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 If cell [0D02: MEASURE’T. SETUP, Local Values] is set to ‘Primary’, the values displayed should be equal to the applied secondary voltage multiplied the corresponding voltage transformer ratio set in the ‘CT & VT RATIOS’ menu column (see Table 10). Again the values should be within 1% of the expected value, plus an additional allowance for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
Page 812 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-64 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 11.5 On load directional test This test is important to ensure that directionalized overcurrent and fault locator functions have the correct forward/reverse response to fault and load conditions. Firstly the actual direction of power flow on the system must be ascertained, using adjacent instrumentation or protection already in-service, or a knowledge of the prevailing network operation conditions.
Page 813 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-65 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 FINAL CHECKS The tests are now complete. Remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc. If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the relay in order to perform the wiring verification tests, it should be ensured that all connections (wiring, fuses and links) are replaced in accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram.
Page 814 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-66 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD Date: Engineer: Station: Circuit: System Frequency: VT Ratio: CT Ratio (tap in use): Front Plate Information Current Differential Protection Relay P54____ Model number Serial number Rated current In Rated voltage Vn Auxiliary voltage Vx Test Equipment Used...
Page 815 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-67 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 *Delete as appropriate Have all relevant safety instructions been Yes* followed? Product checks With the relay de-energized 5.1.1 Visual inspection Relay damaged? Yes* Rating information correct for installation? Yes* Case earth installed? Yes* Yes*...
Page 816 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-68 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 *Delete as appropriate 5.2.6 Input opto-isolators Opto input 1 working? Yes* Opto input 2 working? Yes* Opto input 3 working? Yes* Opto input 4 working? Yes* Opto input 5 working? Yes* Opto input 6...
Page 817 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-69 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 *Delete as appropriate Yes* Opto input 27 working? N/A* Yes* Opto input 28 working? N/A* Yes* Opto input 29 working? N/A* Yes* Opto input 30 working? N/A* Yes* Opto input 31 working? N/A* Yes*...
Page 818 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-70 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 *Delete as appropriate Yes* Relay 18 working? N/A* Yes* Relay 19 working? N/A* Yes* Relay 20 working? N/A* Yes* Relay 21 working? N/A* Yes* Relay 22 working? N/A* Yes* Relay 23 working? N/A*...
Page 819 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-71 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 *Delete as appropriate P545 & Yes* High break Relay 17 P546 External wiring polarity check? N/A* option I Yes* High break Relay 18 External wiring polarity check? N/A* Yes* High break Relay 19 External wiring polarity check? N/A*...
Page 820 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-72 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 *Delete as appropriate Yes* High break Relay 20 External wiring polarity check? N/A* Courier* 5.2.8 Communication standard IEC 60870-5-103* DNP3.0* Communications established? Yes* Yes* Protocol converter tested? N/A* K-Bus* 5.2.9 Second rear communication interface EIA485*...
Page 821 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-73 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 *Delete as appropriate 5.2.11 Voltage inputs Displayed voltage Primary* Secondary* Main VT ratio N/A* C/S VT ratio N/A* Input VT Applied Value Displayed value C/S voltage N/A* CB2 CS voltage N/A* Protection Communications Loopback Protection communications...
Page 822 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-74 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 *Delete as appropriate Communications using P59x units n=4 for P591 n=5 for P592 6.1.n n=6 for P593 Apply to MiCOMho Ch1 and/or Ch2 as appropriate 6.1.n.1 Visual inspection (P59x units only) Ch1 Yes* Ch 1 unit damaged? N/A*...
Page 823 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-75 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 *Delete as appropriate 6.1.n.1 Visual inspection (P59x units only) Ch2 Yes* Ch 2 unit damaged? N/A* Yes* Ch 2 rating information correct? N/A* Yes* Ch 2 earthed? N/A* 6.1.n.2 Insulation resistance (P59x units only) Yes* Ch 2 unit...
Page 824 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-76 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 *Delete as appropriate GPS Synchronization 7.1.1 P594 commissioned? Yes* N/A* 7.1.2 P594 optical signal strength at P54x relay N/A* Check synchronization signal at P54x relay 7.1.3 Yes* N/A* Bit pattern **11********** ? Check GPS failure condition 7.1.4 Yes*...
Page 825 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-77 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 *Delete as appropriate Protection dependencies noted & preparations 8.4.1 Yes* N/A* made? 8.4.2 Injection testing - distance zones Current diff Earth fault Overcurrent Elements to be re-enabled after testing 8.4.2.1 (mark any that have been temporarily disabled) CB fail...
Page 826 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-78 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 *Delete as appropriate 8.4.4 Distance protection scheme testing 8.4.4.1 Scheme trip zone 1 extension scheme No trip for fault with reset Z1X energized Yes* Trip time with reset Z1X de-energized 8.4.4.2 Scheme trip permissive schemes (PUR/POR) Trip time with signal receive energized...
Page 827 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-79 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 *Delete as appropriate 8.4.8.1 Signal send test for permissive schemes Signal send operate time 8.4.8.2 Signal send blocking schemes Signal send operate time All disabled elements which were noted/circled Yes* previously are restored? 8.4.9...
Page 828 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-80 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 *Delete as appropriate Applied current Expected operating time 8.4.12.3 Measured operating time All disabled elements which were noted/circled Yes* previously are restored? 8.4.13 Restore Communicxations and clear VTS? Yes* N/A* Trip and auto-reclose cycle checked Yes*...
Page 829 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-81 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 *Delete as appropriate 9.1.1 - 9.1.4 All local connections restored? Local Ch 1 Yes* Yes* Local Ch 2 N/A* Application-specific settings applied? (P592 only) Yes* Local Ch 1 N/A* Yes* Local Ch 2 N/A*...
Page 830 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-82 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 *Delete as appropriate END-TO-END SCHEME TESTS 10.1 Signaling channel check 10.1.1.1 Aided scheme 1 signaling channel test 10.1.1.2 Yes* Local - remote end signal received N/A* 10.1.1.3 Yes* Remote - local end signal received N/A* 10.1.2 Aided scheme 2 signaling channel test...
Page 831 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-83 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 *Delete as appropriate Yes* Current counters reset? N/A* Event records reset? Yes* Fault records reset? Yes* Disturbance records reset? Yes* Alarms reset? Yes* LEDs reset? Yes* Communications statistics reset? Yes* Yes* Secondary front cover replaced?
Page 832 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-84 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Commissioning Engineer Customer Witness Date: Date:...
Page 833 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-85 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 SETTING RECORD Date: Engineer: Station: Circuit: System Frequency: VT Ratio: CT Ratio (tap in use): Front plate information Current Differential Protection Relay P54x Model number Serial number Rated current In Rated voltage Vn Auxiliary voltage Vx Setting groups used...
Page 834 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-86 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 0700 CB CONTROL P543/P545 Model Disabled* Local* Remote* Local + Remote* Opto* 0701 CB Control by Opto + Local* Opto + Remote* Opto + Rem. + Local 0702 Close Pulse Time 0703 Trip Pulse Time 0704...
Page 835 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-87 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 0700 CB CONTROL P544/P546 Model 079E Res LO by ExtDDB Disabled * Enabled * 079F Res LO by TDelay Disabled * Enabled * 07A0 LO Reset Time 0800 DATE AND TIME 0804 IRIG-B Sync.
Page 836 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-88 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 0900 CONFIGURATION 0902 Setting Group Select via Menu* Select via Optos* Group 1* Group 2* Group 3* 0903 Active Settings Group 4* 0907 Setting Group 1 Disabled* Enabled* 0908 Setting Group 2 Disabled* Enabled*...
Page 837 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-89 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 0900 CONFIGURATION 0950 Function Key Invisible* Visible* 09FF LCD Contrast 0A00 CT AND VT RATIOS P543/P545 Model 0A00 CT AND VT RATIOS 0A01 Main VT Primary 0A02 Main VT Sec'y 0A03 C/S VT Primary 0A04...
Page 838 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-90 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 0A00 CT AND VT RATIOS P544/P546 Model 0A11 CT1 Polarity Standard* Inverted* 0A12 CT2 Polarity Standard* Inverted* 0A13 SEF CT Polarity Standard* Inverted* 0A14 M CT Polarity Standard* Inverted* 0A21 CB1 CS VT PhShft Degrees...
Page 839 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-91 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 0C00 DISTURB. RECORDER 0C12 Digital Input 4 No Trigger* Trigger L – H* 0C13 Input 4 Trigger Trigger H – L* 0C14 Digital Input 5 No Trigger* Trigger L – H* 0C15 Input 5 Trigger Trigger H –...
Page 840 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-92 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 0C00 DISTURB. RECORDER 0C2C Digital Input 17 No Trigger* Trigger L – H* 0C2D Input 17 Trigger Trigger H – L* 0C2E Digital Input 18 No Trigger* Trigger L – H* 0C2F Input 18 Trigger Trigger H –...
Page 841 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-93 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 0C00 DISTURB. RECORDER 0C46 Digital Input 30 No Trigger* Trigger L – H* 0C47 Input 30 Trigger Trigger H – L* 0C48 Digital Input 31 No Trigger* Trigger L – H* 0C49 Input 31 Trigger Trigger H –...
Page 842 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-94 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 0E00 COMMUNICATIONS 0E07 RP1 Physical Link EIA(RS)485* Fiber Optic* 0E08 RP1 Time Sync. Disabled* Enabled* Disabled* Monitor Blocking* 0E0A RP1 CS103 Blocking Command Blocking* K-bus* EIA 485* 0E0C RP1 Port Config. Not applicable* FT1.2 Frame* 10-bit Frame*...
Page 843 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-95 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 1000 CB MONITOR SETUP P543/P545 Model 1001 Broken I^ 1002 I^ Maintenance Alarm Disabled* Alarm Enabled* 1003 I^ Maintenance 1004 I^ Lockout Alarm Disabled* Alarm Enabled* 1005 I^ Lockout 1006 No.
Page 844 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-96 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 1000 CB MONITOR SETUP P544/P546 Model 1027 No. CB2 Ops. Maint. 1028 No. CB2 Ops. Lock Alarm Disabled* Alarm Enabled* 1029 No. CB2 Ops. Lock 102A CB2 Time Maint. Alarm Disabled* Alarm Enabled* 102B...
Page 845 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-97 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 1100 OPTO CONFIG. 111D Opto Input 28 111E Opto Input 29 111F Opto Input 30 1120 Opto Input 31 1121 Opto Input 32 1150 Filter Control 1180 Characteristic Standard 60% - 80%* 50% - 70%* 1300 CTRL.
Page 846 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-98 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 1300 CTRL. I/P CONFIG. 134C Control Input 16 Latched* Pulsed* 134D Ctrl Command 16 1350 Control Input 17 Latched* Pulsed* 1351 Ctrl Command 17 1354 Control Input 18 Latched* Pulsed* 1355 Ctrl Command 18...
Page 847 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-99 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 1700 FUNCTION KEYS 1706 Fn. Key 2 Mode Normal* Toggle* 1707 Fn. Key 2 Label 1708 Fn. Key 3 Status Unlock* Enable* 1709 Fn. Key 3 Mode Normal* Toggle* 170A Fn.
Page 848 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-100 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 2000 PROT COMMS/IM64 2 end dual red. 3 end 2001 Scheme Setup 2002/3 Address 2010 Comms Mode 2011 Baud Rate Ch1 56kbits 64kbits 2012 Baud Rate Ch2 56kbits 64kbits 2013 Clock Source Ch1 Internal...
Page 849 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-101 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 2000 PROT COMMS/IM64 2040 IM5 Cmd Type 2041 IM5 FallBackMode 2042 IM5 DefaultValue 2044 IM6 Cmd Type 2045 IM6 FallBackMode 2046 IM6 DefaultValue 2048 IM7 Cmd Type 2049 IM7 FallBackMode 204A IM7 DefaultValue 204C...
Page 850 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-102 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 2900 CNTRL. I/P LABELS 291A Control Input 26 291B Control Input 27 291C Control Input 28 291D Control Input 29 291E Control Input 30 291F Control Input 31 2920 Control Input 32 3000 LINE PARAMETERS...
Page 851 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-103 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 3100 DISTANCE SETUP Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 1 settings settings settings settings settings 3152 Zone P Ph Reach 3160 Zone 4 Ph Status 3161 Zone 4 Ph Reach 3171 Ground Chars...
Page 852 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-104 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 3200 DIST. ELEMENTS Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 1 settings settings settings settings settings 3202 Z1 Phase Reach 3203 Z1 Phase Angle 3207 Z1 Ph Resistive 3208 Z1 Tilt Top-Line 3209...
Page 853 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-105 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 3200 DIST. ELEMENTS Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 1 settings settings settings settings settings 3261 Z2 Gnd. Angle 3263 Z2 Dynamic Tilt 3264 Z2 Tilt Top Line 3265 kZN1 Res.
Page 854 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-106 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 3200 DIST. ELEMENTS Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 1 settings settings settings settings settings 3298 kZm4 Mut Angle 3299 R4 G Resistive 329B Z4 Gnd Sensitivity 3300 PHASE DIFF Group 1...
Page 855 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-107 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 3400 SCHEME LOGIC Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 1 settings settings settings settings settings 3412 Zone 2 Gnd Delay 3418 Zone 3 Tripping 3419 Zone 3 Ph Delay 341A Zone 3 Gnd Delay 3420...
Page 856 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-108 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 3400 SCHEME LOGIC Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 1 settings settings settings settings settings 346B Unblocking Delay 3470 Weak Infeed 3471 WI Single Pole Trip 3472 WI V<...
Page 857 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-109 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 3500 OVERCURRENT Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 1 settings settings settings settings settings 350C I>2 Directional 350D I>2 Current Set 350E I>2 Time Delay 350F I>2 TMS 3510 I>2 Time Dial...
Page 858 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-110 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 3800 EARTH FAULT Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 1 settings settings settings settings settings 3801 IN>1 Status 3825 IN>1 Function 3826 IN>1 Directional 3829 IN>1 Current Set 382A IN1>1 IDG Is 382C...
Page 859 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-111 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 3900 AIDED DEF Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 1 settings settings settings settings settings 3902 DEF Status 3903 DEF Polarizing 3904 DEF Char Angle 3905 DEF VNpol Set 3906 DEF V2pol Set...
Page 860 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-112 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 3A00 SENSITIVE E/F Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 1 settings settings settings settings settings 3A57 ISEF> Blocking 3A57 ISEF DIRECTIONAL 3A59 ISEF> Char Angle 3A5A ISEF>...
Page 861 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-113 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 3D00 POWER SWING BLK Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 1 settings settings settings settings settings 3D0D Zone 1 Gnd PSB 3D1F Zone 2 Gnd PSB 3D11 Zone 3 Gnd PSB 3D13...
Page 862 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-114 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 4200 VOLTAGE PROTECTION Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 1 settings settings settings settings settings 4212 V>1 Time Delay 4213 V>1 TMS 4214 V>2 Status 4215 V>2 Voltage Set 4216 V>2 Time Delay...
Page 863 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-115 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 4400 DF/DT PROTECTION Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 1 settings settings settings settings settings 4401 df/dt Avg.Cycles 4404 df/dt>1 Status 4405 df/dt>1 Setting 4406 df/dt>1 Dir'n 4407 df/dt>1 Time 440B...
Page 864 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-116 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 4600 SUPERVISION Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 1 settings settings settings settings settings 4601 VTS Mode 4602 VTS Status 4603 VTS Reset Mode 4604 VTS Time Delay 4605 VTS I>...
Page 865 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-117 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 P543/P545 4800 SYSTEM CHECKS model Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 1 settings settings settings settings settings 4823 CS Overvoltage 4824 CS Diff. Voltage 4825 CS Voltage Block 4827 SS Status 4828...
Page 866 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-118 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 4800 SYSTEM CHECKS P544/P546 model Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 1 settings settings settings settings settings VOLTAGE MONITORS 489E CB2 CS1 Angle 489F CB2 CS1 VDiff 48A0 CB2 CS1 SlipCtrl 48A1...
Page 867 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-119 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 P543/P545 4900 AUTO-RECLOSE model Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 1 settings settings settings settings settings 490F Reclaim Time 4910 AR Inhibit Time 4925 Check Sync Time 4927 Z2T AR (Only in models with...
Page 868 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-120 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 P543/P545 4900 AUTO-RECLOSE model Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 1 settings settings settings settings settings 4941 CS1 Close Enable 4942 CS2 Close Enable 4943 LiveLine/DeadBus 4944 DeadLine/LiveBus 4945...
Page 869 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-121 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 4900 AUTO-RECLOSE P544/P546 model Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 1 settings settings settings settings settings Z1 AR 4972 (Only in models with distance option) 4973 Diff AR Dist Aided AR 4974...
Page 870 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-122 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 4900 AUTO-RECLOSE P544/P546 model Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 1 settings settings settings settings settings 49A7 CB1L SC Shot 1 49A8 CB1L SC ClsNoDly 49A9 CB1L SC CS1 49AA CB1L SC CS2...
Page 871 Commissioning P54x/EN CM/La4 CM) 10-123 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 4A00 INPUT LABELS Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 1 settings settings settings settings settings 4A06 Opto Input 6 4A07 Opto Input 7 4A08 Opto Input 8 4A09 Opto Input 9 4A0A...
Page 872 P54x/EN CM/La4 Commissioning (CM) 10-124 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 4B00 OUTPUT LABELS Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 1 settings settings settings settings settings 4B09 Relay 9 4B0A Relay 10 4B0B Relay 11 4B0C Relay 12 4B0D Relay 13 4B0E...
Page 873: P54X/En Mt/La4
Maintenance P54x/EN MT/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 MAINTENANCE Date: March 2009 Hardware Suffix: Software Version: 44 (P543/4/5/6 without Distance) 54 (P543/4/5/6 with Distance) Connection Diagrams: 10P54302xx (xx = 01 to 02) & 10P54303xx (xx = 01 to 02) 10P54402xx (xx = 01 to 02) &...
Page 874 P54x/EN MT/La4 Maintenance MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 875 Maintenance P54x/EN MT/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (MT) 11-1 CONTENTS (MT) 11- MAINTENANCE Maintenance period Maintenance checks 1.2.1 Alarms 1.2.2 Opto-isolators 1.2.3 Output relays Method of repair 1.3.1 P54x relay 1.3.1.1 Replacing the complete relay 1.3.1.2 Replacing a PCB Re-calibration 1.4.1 P54x relay...
Page 876 P54x/EN MT/La4 Maintenance (MT) 11-2 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 877 In view of the critical nature of protective relays and their infrequent operation, it is desirable to confirm that they are operating correctly at regular intervals. ALSTOM Grid protective relays are designed for a life in excess of 20 years. MiCOM relays are self-supervizing and so require less maintenance than earlier designs of relay.
Page 878 P54x/EN MT/La4 Maintenance (MT) 11-4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Method of repair 1.3.1 P54x relay If the relay should develop a fault whilst in service, depending on the nature of the fault, the watchdog contacts will change state and an alarm condition will be flagged. Due to the extensive use of surface-mount components faulty PCBs should be replaced, as it is not possible to perform repairs on damaged circuits.
Page 879 Service Centers approved by ALSTOM Grid. Failure to obtain the authorization of ALSTOM Grid After Sales Engineers prior to commencing work may invalidate the product warranty. Before removing the front panel to replace a PCB the auxiliary supply must be removed, and wait 5 s for capacitors to discharge.
Page 880 P54x/EN MT/La4 Maintenance (MT) 11-6 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Note: Only use a type ½AA Lithium battery with a nominal voltage of 3.6V and safety approvals such as UL (Underwriters Laboratory), CSA (Canadian Standards Association) or VDE (Vereinigung Deutscher Elektrizitätswerke).
Page 881: P54X/En Ts/La4
Troubleshooting P54x/EN TS/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 TROUBLESHOOTING Date: March 2009 Hardware Suffix: 45 (P543/4/5/6 without Distance) Software Version: 55 (P543/4/5/6 with Distance) 10P54302 (SH 1 to 2) Connection Diagrams: 10P54303 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54400 10P54404 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54405 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54502 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54503 (SH 1 to 2)
Page 882 P54x/EN TS/La4 Troubleshooting MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 883 Troubleshooting P54x/EN TS/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (TS) 12-1 CONTENTS (TS) 12- INTRODUCTION INITIAL PROBLEM IDENTIFICATION POWER UP ERRORS ERROR MESSAGE/CODE ON POWER-UP OUT OF SERVICE LED ILLUMINATED ON POWER UP ERROR CODE DURING OPERATION Failure of co-processor card MAL-OPERATION OF THE RELAY DURING TESTING Failure of output contacts 7.1.1...
Page 884 P54x/EN TS/La4 Troubleshooting (TS) 12-2 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 885 Troubleshooting P54x/EN TS/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (TS) 12-3 INTRODUCTION Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the Safety Guide (SFTY/4L M/H11) or later issue, or the Safety and Technical Data sections of this Technical Manual and also the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.
Page 886 Other error codes relate to problems within actual error. the main processor board hardware or software. It will be necessary to contact ALSTOM Grid with details of the problem for a full analysis. Relay displays message The power up tests have detected corrupted...
Page 887  key. If relay powers up successfully, check programmable logic for feedback paths. Other error codes will relate to software errors on the main processor board, contact ALSTOM Grid. Table 3: Power-up self test error OUT OF SERVICE LED ILLUMINATED ON POWER UP Test...
Page 888 P54x/EN TS/La4 Troubleshooting (TS) 12-6 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 ERROR CODE DURING OPERATION The relay performs continuous self-checking, if an error is detected then an error message will be displayed, a maintenance record will be logged and the relay will reset (after a 1.6 second delay).
Page 889 Troubleshooting P54x/EN TS/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (TS) 12-7 MAL-OPERATION OF THE RELAY DURING TESTING Failure of output contacts An apparent failure of the relay output contacts may be caused by the relay configuration; the following tests should be performed to identify the real cause of the failure. Note that the relay self-tests verify that the coil of the contact has been energized, an error will be displayed if there is a fault in the output relay board.
Page 890 P54x/EN TS/La4 Troubleshooting (TS) 12-8 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Failure of opto-isolated inputs The opto-isolated inputs are mapped onto the relay internal signals using the programmable scheme logic. If an input does not appear to be recognized by the relay scheme logic the Commission Tests/Opto Status menu option can be used to verify whether the problem is in the opto-isolated input itself or the mapping of its signal to the scheme logic functions.
Page 891 Troubleshooting P54x/EN TS/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (TS) 12-9 Comms changed This indicates that the setting 2010 Comms Mode has been changed without a subsequent power off and on. IEEE C37.94 fail This indicates a Signal Lost, a Path Yellow or a mismatch in the number ofN*64 channels used on either channel 1 or channel 2.
Page 892 1. Get the Repair and Modification Authorization Form (RMA)  To obtain an electronic version of the RMA form for e-mailing, please visit the following URL: www.alstom.com/grid/productrepair/ 2. Fill in RMA form Fill in only the white part of the form.
Page 893: P54X/En Sc/La4
SCADA Communications P54x/EN SC/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 SCADA COMMUNICATIONS Date: March 2009 Hardware Suffix: 45 (P543/4/5/6 without Distance) Software Version: 55 (P543/4/5/6 with Distance) Connection Diagrams: 10P54302 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54303 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54400 10P54404 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54405 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54502 (SH 1 to 2)
Page 894 P54x/EN SC/La4 SCADA Communications MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 895 SCADA Communications P54x/EN SC/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (SC) 13-1 CONTENTS (SC) 13- SCADA COMMUNICATIONS Introduction Connections to the communications ports 1.2.1 Connections to the front port 1.2.2 Connections to the EIA(RS)485 rear port, RP1 1.2.2.1 EIA(RS)485 bus 1.2.2.2 EIA(RS)485 Bus termination 1.2.2.3...
Page 896 P54x/EN SC/La4 SCADA Communications (SC) 13-2 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Test mode Disturbance records 3.10 Blocking of monitor direction DNP3.0 INTERFACE DNP3.0 protocol Object 1 binary inputs Object 10 binary outputs Object 20 binary counters Object 30 analog input Object 40 analog output DNP3.0 configuration using MiCOM S1 Studio IEC 61850 ETHERNET INTERFACE...
Page 897 SCADA Communications P54x/EN SC/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (SC) 13-3 SCADA COMMUNICATIONS Introduction This section outlines the remote communications interfaces of the MiCOM P54x series of relays. The relay supports a choice of one of three protocols via a rear 2-wire EIA(RS)485 communication interface (RP1), selected via the model number when ordering.
Page 898 P54x/EN SC/La4 SCADA Communications (SC) 13-4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Connections to the communications ports 1.2.1 Connections to the front port The front communications port is not intended for permanent connection. The front communications port supports the Courier protocol and is implemented on an EIA(RS)232 connection.
Page 899 SCADA Communications P54x/EN SC/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (SC) 13-5 1.2.2.3 EIA(RS)485 bus connections & topologies The EIA(RS)485 standard requires that each device be directly connected to the physical cable that is the communications bus. Stubs and tees are expressly forbidden, as are star topologies.
Page 900  As the field voltage is much higher than that required, ALSTOM Grid cannot assume responsibility for any damage that may occur to a device connected to the network as a result of incorrect application of this voltage.
Page 901 SCADA Communications P54x/EN SC/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (SC) 13-7 P0109ENe Figure 2 K-Bus connection arrangements 1.2.3 Connections to the second rear communications port, RP2 (option) The second rear communications port supports the Courier protocol only. In a similar manner to the front communications port, connection is made using a 9-pin connector.
Page 902 P54x/EN SC/La4 SCADA Communications (SC) 13-8 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 1.2.5 Connections to the Ethernet port (option) Connection for Ethernet communication can be made either by standard RJ45 electrical connections or by multi-mode optical fibers suitable for 1300 nm transmission and terminated with BFOC/2.5 (ST) connectors.
Page 903 SCADA Communications P54x/EN SC/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (SC) 13-9 RP1 InactivTimer 10.00 mins. The inactivity timer controls how long the relay will wait without receiving any messages on the rear port before it reverts to its default state. This includes revoking any password access that was enabled.
Page 904 P54x/EN SC/La4 SCADA Communications (SC) 13-10 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 1.3.3 Configuring the second rear courier port, RP2 (where fitted) For relays having the second rear (Courier) communications port fitted, the settings are located immediately below the ones for the first port described above. The second rear communications port only supports the Courier protocol and the settings are similar to those for Courier RP1.
Page 905 SCADA Communications P54x/EN SC/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (SC) 13-11 The inactivity timer controls how long the relay will wait without receiving any messages on the rear port before it reverts to its default state. This includes revoking any password access that was enabled.
Page 906 P54x/EN SC/La4 SCADA Communications (SC) 13-12 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Figure 4 Second rear port EIA(RS)485 example Figure 5 Second rear port EIA(RS)232 example...
Page 907 SCADA Communications P54x/EN SC/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (SC) 13-13 1.3.4 Configuring the IEC 60870-5-103 rear port, RP1 The IEC specification IEC 60870-5-103: Telecontrol Equipment and Systems, Part 5: Transmission Protocols Section 103 defines the use of standards IEC 60870-5-1 to IEC 60870-5-5 to perform communication with protection equipment.
Page 908 P54x/EN SC/La4 SCADA Communications (SC) 13-14 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 The default setting is to select the electrical (copper) connection. If the optional fiber optic interface is fitted to the relay, then this setting can be changed to ‘Fiber optic’. This cell is invisible if a second rear communications port or an Ethernet card is fitted, as they are mutually exclusive and occupy the same physical location.
Page 909 SCADA Communications P54x/EN SC/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (SC) 13-15 The next cell sets the device address on the DNP3.0 network: RP1 Address Up to 32 devices can be connected to one DNP3.0 spur, and therefore it is necessary for each device to have a unique address so that messages from the master control station are accepted by only one device.
Page 910 P54x/EN SC/La4 SCADA Communications (SC) 13-16 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 A message gap setting is provided: Message Gap  This allows a gap between message frames to be set to enable compatibility with different master stations. The setting for enabling/disabling DNP3.0 time synchronization is described above. When DNP3.0 time sync is enabled, the required rate of synchronization, known as the “need time”, needs to be set.
Page 911 SCADA Communications P54x/EN SC/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (SC) 13-17 1.3.5.2 Configuring the (optional) DNP3.0 over Ethernet port When DNP3.0 is provided over Ethernet, settings similar to those described above for the EIA(RS)485 connection are provided for the following :- ...
Page 912 P54x/EN SC/La4 SCADA Communications (SC) 13-18 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 COURIER INTERFACE Courier protocol Refer to previous sections on connection and configuration for details of the Courier interface. Supported command set The following Courier commands are supported by the relay: Protocol Layer Reset Remote Link Poll Status...
Page 913 SCADA Communications P54x/EN SC/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (SC) 13-19 Relay courier database The Courier database is a two dimensional structure with each cell in the database being referenced by a row and column address. Both the column and the row can take a range from 0 to 255.
Page 914 P54x/EN SC/La4 SCADA Communications (SC) 13-20 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 2.5.1 Automatic event extraction (See Chapter 7 Courier User Guide, publication R6512) This method is intended for continuous extraction of event and fault information as it is produced. It is only supported via the rear Courier port. When new event information is created the event bit is set within the status byte, this indicates to the master device that event information is available.
Page 915 SCADA Communications P54x/EN SC/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (SC) 13-21 2.5.4 Manual event record extraction Column 01 of the database can be used for manual viewing of event, fault, and maintenance records. The contents of this column will depend on the nature of the record selected. It is possible to select events by event number and to directly select a fault record or maintenance record by number.
Page 916 P54x/EN SC/La4 SCADA Communications (SC) 13-22 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 The programmable scheme logic settings can be uploaded and downloaded to and from the relay using this mechanism. If it is necessary to edit the settings MiCOM S1 Studio must be used as the data format is compressed.
Page 917 SCADA Communications P54x/EN SC/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (SC) 13-23 Spontaneous events Events are categorized using the following information:  Function type  Information number The IEC 60870-5-103 profile in the Relay Menu Database, P54x/EN MD, contains a complete listing of all events produced by the relay.
Page 918 P54x/EN SC/La4 SCADA Communications (SC) 13-24 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 DNP3.0 INTERFACE DNP3.0 protocol The descriptions given here are intended to accompany the device profile document that is included in the Relay Menu Database, P54x/EN MD. The DNP3.0 protocol is not described here, please refer to the documentation available from the user group.
Page 919 SCADA Communications P54x/EN SC/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (SC) 13-25 The diagram below illustrates the behavior when the Control Input is set to Pulsed or Latched. DNP Latch DNP Latch DNP Latch DNP Latch Control Input (Latched) Aliased Control Input (Latched ) Control Input...
Page 920 P54x/EN SC/La4 SCADA Communications (SC) 13-26 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Object 30 analog input Object 30, analog inputs, contains information from the relay’s measurements columns in the menu. All object 30 points can be reported as 16 or 32 bit integer values with flag, 16 or 32 bit integer without flag as well as short floating-point values.
Page 921 The MiCOM protection relays can integrate with the PACiS substation control systems, to complete ALSTOM Grid Automation's offer of a full IEC 61850 solution for the substation. The majority of MiCOM Px4x relay types can be supplied with Ethernet, in addition to traditional serial protocols.
Page 922 P54x/EN SC/La4 SCADA Communications (SC) 13-28 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Figure 7 Data model layers in IEC 61850 The levels of this hierarchy can be described as follows:  Physical Device – Identifies the actual IED within a system. Typically the device’s name or IP address can be used (for example Feeder_1 or 10.0.0.2).
Page 923 SCADA Communications P54x/EN SC/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (SC) 13-29 IEC 61850 in MiCOM relays IEC 61850 is implemented in MiCOM relays by use of a separate Ethernet card. This card manages the majority of the IEC 61850 implementation and data transfer to avoid any impact on the performance of the protection.
Page 924 P54x/EN SC/La4 SCADA Communications (SC) 13-30 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Other features include the extraction of configuration data for viewing and editing, and a sophisticated error checking sequence which ensures that the configuration data is valid for sending to the IED and that the IED will function within the context of the substation. To aid the user, some configuration data is available in the ‘IED CONFIGURATOR’...
Page 925 SCADA Communications P54x/EN SC/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (SC) 13-31 The communication services of MiCOM relays The IEC 61850 communication services which are implemented in the Px40 relays are described in the Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) document, which is available separately.
Page 926 P54x/EN SC/La4 SCADA Communications (SC) 13-32 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 5.6.2 IEC 61850 GOOSE configuration All GOOSE configuration is performed via the IED Configurator tool available within the MiCOM S1 Studio Support Software. All GOOSE publishing configuration can be found under the ‘GOOSE Publishing’ tab in the configuration editor window.
Page 927: P54X/En Sg/La4
Symbols and Glossary P54x/EN SG/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 SYMBOLS AND GLOSSARY Date: March 2009 Hardware Suffix: 45 (P543/4/5/6 without Distance) Software Version: 55 (P543/4/5/6 with Distance) Connection Diagrams: 10P54302 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54303 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54400 10P54404 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54405 (SH 1 to 2)
Page 928 P54x/EN SG/La4 Symbols and Glossary MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 929 Symbols and Glossary P54x/EN SG/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (SG) 14-1 Logic symbols Symbols Explanation < Less than: Used to indicate an “under” threshold, such as undercurrent (current dropout). > Greater than: Used to indicate an “over” threshold, such as overcurrent (current overload) &...
Page 930 P54x/EN SG/La4 Symbols and Glossary (SG) 14-2 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Symbols Explanation Channel Transmit: Typically used to indicate a teleprotection signal send. Capacitor-coupled Voltage Transformer - equivalent to terminology CCVT. Digital data bus within the programmable scheme logic: A logic point that has a zero or 1 status.
Page 931 Symbols and Glossary P54x/EN SG/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (SG) 14-3 Symbols Explanation I>3 Third stage of phase overcurrent protection: Could be labeled 51-3 in ANSI terminology. I>4 Fourth stage of phase overcurrent protection: Could be labeled 51-4 in ANSI terminology. Zero sequence current: Equals one third of the measured neutral/residual current.
Page 932 P54x/EN SG/La4 Symbols and Glossary (SG) 14-4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Symbols Explanation Distance in kilometers The mutual compensation factor (mutual compensation of distance elements and fault locator for parallel line coupling effects). The residual compensation factor: Ensuring correct reach for ground distance elements. Liquid crystal display: The front-panel text display on the relay.
Page 933 Symbols and Glossary P54x/EN SG/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (SG) 14-5 Symbols Explanation PN> Wattmetric earth fault protection: Calculated using residual voltage and current quantities. Power swing blocking, to detect power swing/out of step functions (ANSI 78). Programmable scheme logic: The part of the relay’s logic configuration that can be modified by the user, using the graphical editor within MiCOM S1 software.
Page 934 P54x/EN SG/La4 Symbols and Glossary (SG) 14-6 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Symbols Explanation V< An undervoltage element. V<1 First stage of undervoltage protection: Could be labeled 27-1 in ANSI terminology. V<2 Second stage of undervoltage protection: Could be labeled 27-2 in ANSI terminology. V>...
Page 935 Symbols and Glossary P54x/EN SG/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (SG) 14-7 Logic timers Logic Explanation Time chart symbols Delay on pick-up timer, t Delay on drop-off timer, t Delay on pick-up/drop-off timer Pulse timer Pulse pick-up falling edge Pulse pick-up raising edge Latch...
Page 936 P54x/EN SG/La4 Symbols and Glossary (SG) 14-8 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Logic Explanation Time chart symbols Dwell timer Straight (non latching): Hold value until input reset signal...
Page 937 Symbols and Glossary P54x/EN SG/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (SG) 14-9 Logic gates...
Page 938 P54x/EN SG/La4 Symbols and Glossary (SG) 14-10 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 939: P54X/En In/La4
Installation P54x/EN IN/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 INSTALLATION Date: March 2009 Hardware Suffix: 45 (P543/4/5/6 without Distance) Software Version: 55 (P543/4/5/6 with Distance) Connection Diagrams: 10P54302 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54303 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54400 10P54404 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54405 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54502 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54503 (SH 1 to 2)
Page 940 P54x/EN IN/La4 Installation MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 941 Installation P54x/EN IN/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (IN) 15-1 CONTENTS (IN) 15- RECEIPT OF RELAYS HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE UNPACKING RELAY MOUNTING Rack mounting Panel mounting RELAY WIRING Medium and heavy duty terminal block connections EIA(RS)485 port IRIG-B connections (if applicable) EIA(RS)232 front port Ethernet port for IEC 61850 (if applicable)
Page 942 P54x/EN IN/La4 Installation (IN) 15-2 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Figure 9 P543 external connection diagram - inputs/outputs default mapping - high break relay outputs16 Figure 10 P544 external connection diagram Figure 11 P544 external connection diagram - inputs/outputs default mapping - standard relay outputs 18 Figure 12 P544 external connection diagram - inputs/outputs default mapping - standard relay outputs 19 Figure 13...
Page 943 On receipt, relays should be examined immediately to ensure no external damage has been sustained in transit. If damage has been sustained, a claim should be made to the transport contractor and ALSTOM Grid should be promptly notified. Relays that are supplied unmounted and not intended for immediate installation should be returned to their protective polythene bags and delivery carton.
Page 944 P54x/EN IN/La4 Installation (IN) 15-4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 STORAGE If relays are not to be installed immediately upon receipt, they should be stored in a place free from dust and moisture in their original cartons. Where de-humidifier bags have been included in the packing they should be retained.
Page 945 Installation P54x/EN IN/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (IN) 15-5 RELAY MOUNTING MiCOM relays are dispatched either individually or as part of a panel/rack assembly. Individual relays are normally supplied with an outline diagram showing the dimensions for panel cutouts and hole centers. This information can also be found in the product publication.
Page 946 P54x/EN IN/La4 Installation (IN) 15-6 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Panel mounting The P54x may be specifically-ordered for panel mounting. The model number must have an “M” selection as the 10 digit, example: P54XxxxxxMxxxxx The relays can be flush mounted into panels using M4 SEMS Taptite self-tapping screws with captive 3 mm thick washers (also known as a SEMS unit).
Page 947 Installation P54x/EN IN/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (IN) 15-7 P0147ENd Figure 2 Rack mounting of panel-mount relays...
Page 948 If required, ALSTOM Grid can supply M4 90° crimp ring terminals in three different sizes depending on wire size (see table below). Each type is available in bags of 100.
Page 949 Installation P54x/EN IN/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (IN) 15-9 EIA(RS)485 port Connections to the EIA(RS)485 port are made using ring terminals. It is recommended that a 2 core screened cable is used with a maximum total length of 1000 m or 200 nF total cable capacitance.
Page 950 P54x/EN IN/La4 Installation (IN) 15-10 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Ethernet port for DNP3.0 (if applicable) Fiber Optic Port The relays can have 100 Mbps Ethernet port. Fiber optic connection is recommended for use in permanent connections in a substation environment. The 100 Mbit port uses type ST (BFOC2.5) connectors, compatible with 50/125 µm or 62.5/125 µm multimode fibers for use at 1300 nm wavelength.
Page 951 Installation P54x/EN IN/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (IN) 15-11 P54x CASE DIMENSIONS P1616ENi Figure 3 P543 and P544 models case dimensions - 60TE case Figure 4 P545 and P546 models case dimensions - 80TE case...
Page 952 P54x/EN IN/La4 Installation (IN) 15-12 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 P54x 2ND REAR COMMUNICATION BOARD CONNECTION DIAGRAM Figure 5 P54x second rear port connection...
Page 953 Installation P54x/EN IN/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (IN) 15-13 P54x EXTERNAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS Figure 6 P543 external connection diagram - standard relay outputs...
Page 954 P54x/EN IN/La4 Installation (IN) 15-14 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Figure 7 P543 external connection diagram - inputs/outputs default mapping - standard relay outputs...
Page 955 Installation P54x/EN IN/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (IN) 15-15 Figure 8 P543 external connection diagram - high break relay outputs...
Page 956 P54x/EN IN/La4 Installation (IN) 15-16 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Figure 9 P543 external connection diagram - inputs/outputs default mapping - high break relay outputs...
Page 957 Installation P54x/EN IN/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (IN) 15-17 Figure 10 P544 external connection diagram...
Page 958 P54x/EN IN/La4 Installation (IN) 15-18 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Figure 11 P544 external connection diagram - inputs/outputs default mapping - standard relay outputs...
Page 959 Installation P54x/EN IN/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (IN) 15-19 Figure 12 P544 external connection diagram - inputs/outputs default mapping - standard relay outputs...
Page 960 P54x/EN IN/La4 Installation (IN) 15-20 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Figure 13 P544 external connection diagram - inputs/outputs default mapping - standard & high break relay outputs...
Page 961 Installation P54x/EN IN/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (IN) 15-21 Figure 14 P544 external connection diagram - inputs/outputs default mapping - standard & high break relay outputs...
Page 962 P54x/EN IN/La4 Installation (IN) 15-22 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Figure 15 P545 external connection diagram - standard relay outputs...
Page 963 Installation P54x/EN IN/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (IN) 15-23 Figure 16 P545 external connection diagram - inputs/outputs default mapping - standard relay outputs...
Page 964 P54x/EN IN/La4 Installation (IN) 15-24 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Figure 17 P545 external connection diagram - high break relay outputs...
Page 965 Installation P54x/EN IN/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (IN) 15-25 Figure 18 P545 external connection diagram - inputs/outputs default mapping - high break relay outputs...
Page 966 P54x/EN IN/La4 Installation (IN) 15-26 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Figure 19 P546 external connection diagram...
Page 967 Installation P54x/EN IN/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (IN) 15-27 Figure 20 P546 external connection diagram - inputs/outputs default mapping - standard & high break relay outputs...
Page 968 P54x/EN IN/La4 Installation (IN) 15-28 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Figure 21 P546 external connection diagram - inputs/outputs default mapping - standard & high break relay outputs...
Page 969 Installation P54x/EN IN/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (IN) 15-29 Figure 22 P546 external connection diagram - inputs/outputs default mapping – standard & high break relay outputs...
Page 970 P54x/EN IN/La4 Installation (IN) 15-30 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Figure 23 P546 external connection diagram - inputs/outputs default mapping – standard & high break relay outputs...
Page 971 Installation P54x/EN IN/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (IN) 15-31 Figure 24 P546 external connection diagram - inputs/outputs default mapping – Standard & high break relay outputs...
Page 972 P54x/EN IN/La4 Installation (IN) 15-32 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 Figure 25 P546 external connection diagram - inputs/outputs default mapping – Standard & high break relay outputs...
Page 973 Installation P54x/EN IN/La4 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 (IN) 15-33 Figure 26 P546 Final assembly drawing...
Page 974 P54x/EN IN/La4 Installation (IN) 15-34 MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 975: P54X/En Vh/La4
Firmware and Service Manual P54x/EN VH/La4 Version History MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546 FIRMWARE AND SERVICE MANUAL VERSION HISTORY Date: March 2009 Hardware Suffix: Software Version: 45 (P543/4/5/6 without Distance) 55 (P543/4/5/6 with Distance) Connection Diagrams: 10P54302 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54303 (SH 1 to 2) 10P54400 10P54404 (SH 1 to 2)
Page 976 P54x/EN VH/La4 Firmware and Service Manual Version History MiCOM P543, P544, P545 & P546...
Page 977 Relay type: P54x … Software Hardware Original Technical Version Description of Changes Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation Major Minor Feb 2000 First release to production V1.07 or Later TG8613A  PSB. Three settings added to set zone 6 to increase flexibility ...
Page 978 Relay type: P54x … Software Hardware Original Technical Version Description of Changes Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation Major Minor All builds released for maintenance upgrades  Resolved possible reboot caused by disturbance recorder  Resolved possible reboot caused by invalid MODBUS requests ...
Page 979 Relay type: P54x … Software Hardware Original Technical Version Description of Changes Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation Major Minor Only P543 CS103 builds released. Based on 04B Jun 2001 V1.10 or Later TG8613B  Resolved a loss of measurements (columns 3 & 4) problem that can occur in 3 terminal applications Cont.
Page 980 Relay type: P54x … Software Hardware Original Technical Version Description of Changes Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation Major Minor Released to production  Includes all of 05A changes  Requirement to use relays 8, 9 & 10 for Trip A, B & C removed Oct 2000 V2.0 or Later TG8613B...
Page 981 Relay type: P54x … Software Hardware Original Technical Version Description of Changes Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation Major Minor All builds released to production. Based on 05E software  Problem whereby MiCOM S1 could only set group 1 line length corrected ...
Page 982 Relay type: P54x … Software Hardware Original Technical Version Description of Changes Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation Major Minor All builds released to production. Based on 05I software  Resolved incorrect operation of C diff failure alarm in 3 terminal schemes ...
Page 983 Relay type: P54x … Software Hardware Original Technical Version Description of Changes Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation Major Minor Internal Release for validation only - runs on phase 1 hardware with an old co-processor board  In non GPS mode the char modification timer has been made visible in P545/6 ...
Page 984 Relay type: P54x … Software Hardware Original Technical Version Description of Changes Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation Major Minor  Note: Non of the above are relevant to software in production Jun 2001 Cont. Limited release (P543 only) - not released to production. Based on 05K software Feb 2002 V2.08 or Later...
Page 985 Relay type: P54x … Software Hardware Original Technical Version Description of Changes Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation Major Minor  Internal loopback setting added (not full functional)  PSL references added  Reset LEDs DDB name change  Text for cells 0F20 - 0F2F changed ...
Page 986 Relay type: P54x … Software Hardware Original Technical Version Description of Changes Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation Major Minor Internal release for validation only - runs on phase 2 hardware with a new co-processor board  Support for new co-processor board added ...
Page 987 Relay type: P54x … Software Hardware Original Technical Version Description of Changes Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation Major Minor  Added 3 DDB signals to block distance  Removed force 3 pole trip DDB V2.01b Jun 2001  Resolved problem caused by rapid changing self resetting (not issued) alarm resetting the relay when read key pressed ...
Page 988 Relay type: P54x … Software Hardware Original Technical Version Description of Changes Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation Major Minor  Added uncompressed disturbance recorder to CS103 build  Added translations for filter control  Fixed the GI list for P545 & P546 ...
Page 989 Relay type: P54x … Software Hardware Original Technical Version Description of Changes Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation Major Minor  PSB now uses 6 comparators  Distance directional line fixed at -30º  PSB block issued when impedance passes into any Z1, Z2 or ...
Page 990 Relay type: P54x … Software Hardware Original Technical Version Description of Changes Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation Major Minor All builds released to production. Based on 11B software  Fixed a problem in P541 & P542 CS103 builds where the voltage and power measurements were not being marked as invalid Dec 2001...
Page 991 Relay type: P54x … Software Hardware Original Technical Version Description of Changes Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation Major Minor All builds ready. Based on 11E software  Resolved several problems related to the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol  Resolved problem which may cause short duration current Feb 2003 V2.03 or Later P54x/EN T/D11...
Page 992 Relay type: P54x … Software Hardware Original Technical Version Description of Changes Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation Major Minor  Reception of MODBUS frame improved  Rejection of spurious messages injected onto RS485 network improved  Improved self checking of SRAM ...
Page 993 Relay type: P54x … Software Hardware Original Technical Version Description of Changes Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation Major Minor  French language text improvements  Prevent a maintenance record when reading from an inaccessible MODBUS register  Setting “Char Mod Time” was missing on P541 - P544 Mar 2002 V2.05 or Later P54x/EN T/E21...
Page 994 Relay type: P54x … Software Hardware Original Technical Version Description of Changes Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation Major Minor  Resolved problem with P541 & P542 IEC 60870-5-103 builds not running  Resolved a problem with IEC 60870-5-103 class 1 polling ...
Page 995 Relay type: P54x … Software Hardware Original Technical Version Description of Changes Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation Major Minor  Improved self diagnostics relating to input module clock  Modified courier block transfer mechanism so it can handle more than 255 blocks ...
Page 996 Relay type: P54x … Software Hardware Original Technical Version Description of Changes Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation Major Minor  Differential intertrip in IEC 60870-5-103 reported with correct  SRAM self checking added to co-processor board  Reception of MODBUS frame improved ...
Page 997 Relay type: P54x … Software Hardware Original Technical Version Description of Changes Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation Major Minor  Display of number of good messages via MODBUS is corrected  Prevented DNP3.0 time sync causes relay to reboot when IRIG-B is active ...
Page 998 Relay type: P54x … Software Hardware Original Technical Version Description of Changes Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation Major Minor All builds released to production. Based on 13B software  Resolved a problem relating to co-processor SRAM checking  Fixed an incorrect response of the summertime time bit in V2.10 or Later IEC 60870-5-103 protocol (DNP3.0 files)
Page 999 Relay type: P54x … Software Hardware Original Technical Version Description of Changes Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation Major Minor All builds released to production. Based on 13E software  Improvements to the distance protection  Add interframe gap to DNP3.0 ...
Page 1000 Relay type: P54x … Software Hardware Original Technical Version Description of Changes Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation Major Minor  Alarms increased to 96  Corrected the response to courier SEND EVENT  Improved self diagnostics relating to input module clock ...
Page 1001 Relay type: P54x … Software Hardware Original Technical Version Description of Changes Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation Major Minor  PSL logic for user defined intertrips corrected P545 & P546  Permissive intertrip in dual redundant schemes corrected Apr 2003 ...
Page 1002 Relay type: P54x … Software Hardware Original Technical Version Description of Changes Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation Major Minor Limited release for NiCAP + selected others  Extraction of disturbance recorder over MODBUS added  Resolve nucleus missing HISR problems V2.09 or Later P54x/EN T/F32 Oct 2003...

This manual is also suitable for:

Micom p543 Micom p544 Micom p545 Micom p546

Alstom MiCOM P54 Series Technical Manual

Section 1

Section 2

Quick Links

Chapters

Need help?

Questions and answers

Related Manuals for Alstom MiCOM P54 Series

Summary of Contents for Alstom MiCOM P54 Series

This manual is also suitable for:

Table of Contents